JP2009213700A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To prevent fraudulence while preventing increase of the processing loads in a dispense control means and complication of layout of the wiring. <P>SOLUTION: A dispense controlling microcomputer 370 outputs a prize ball 10-count signal to a game controlling microcomputer 560 based on a prescribed number of times (10 times) of input of detection signals from a dispense number count switch 301. The game controlling microcomputer 560 subtracts the value (10) corresponding to the prescribed number from a prize ball counter based on the input of the prize ball 10-count signal from the put-out controlling microcomputer 370, and determines whether or not the count value of the prize ball counter reaches a prescribed threshold (equal to or less than 50). If it is determined that the count value of the prize ball counter reaches a prescribed second threshold, abnormality in the dispense of prize balls is announced based on the determination. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2009,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine that allows a player to play a predetermined game using a gaming medium and pays out the gaming medium based on the fact that the payout condition is satisfied.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, there is provided a variable display unit capable of changing the display state, and configured to give a predetermined game value to the player when the display result of the variable display unit is in a predetermined specific display mode. is there.

  Note that the game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball, or the advantageous state for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, a combination of a predetermined display mode with a display result of a variable display unit that displays a special symbol is usually referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win.

  Game progress in the gaming machine is controlled by game control means such as a microcomputer. When the payout control means for controlling the prize ball payout is mounted on a payout control board different from the main board on which the game control means is mounted, the progress of the game is performed by the game control means mounted on the main board. Since it is controlled, the number of winning balls based on the winning is determined by the game control means, and a control signal indicating the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control board. Then, the payout control means performs a process of paying out the number of prize balls based on the winning based on the control signal from the game control means.

  A gaming machine including a main board on which such game control means is mounted and a payout control board on which payout control means is mounted is described in Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2, for example. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the payout control means outputs a prize ball count signal to the game control means based on the payout number count switch detecting the payout of the game ball. Each time the game control means receives a prize ball count signal, the game control means displays a control command (prize ball payout confirmation designation command) indicating that a single prize ball has been paid out. Send to. Further, the payout control means outputs a payout error signal to the game control means when the lower pan is full or the ball is full. Then, the game control means transmits an error occurrence notification command to the display control board based on the receipt of the payout error signal.

  In addition, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 2, the output of the prize ball count switch is input to the payout control means and also to the game control means. Based on the output of the prize ball count switch, the game control means detects an insufficient payout when no prize balls have been paid out for a predetermined period even though unpaid prize balls remain. To output a gaming machine error status signal. The game control means detects an excessive payout and outputs a gaming machine error state signal when the value of the excessive payout number storage counter exceeds a predetermined value based on the output of the prize ball count switch.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-111000 (paragraph 0177-0182, FIG. 23-24) JP 2003-154138 A (paragraph 0073, paragraph 0293-0298, FIG. 10, FIG. 43)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the payout control means outputs a prize ball count signal to the game control means every time the payout number count switch detects payout of the game balls. Therefore, the processing load of the prize ball count signal output by the payout control means is large. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 2, the output of the prize ball count switch is input to both the game control means and the payout control means. Therefore, the wiring of the output signal of the prize ball count switch is complicated, and the arrangement of the main board on which the game control means is mounted and the payout control board on which the payout control board is mounted is restricted, and the degree of freedom is lost. End up.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing an illegal act while preventing an increase in the processing load of the payout control means and a complicated wiring arrangement.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention allows a player to play a predetermined game using a game medium (for example, a game ball), and that a payout condition is satisfied (for example, a big winning opening, winning openings 29, 30). , 33, 39, or a game ball that pays out game media based on the winning winning openings 13, 14), and a game control means for executing a game control process for controlling the progress of the game (for example, , A game control microcomputer 560), a payout means (for example, a ball payout device 97) for paying out game media, and a payout control means (for example, a payout control microcomputer) for executing a payout control process for controlling the payout means 370), and a payout detecting means (for example, detecting a payout of a prize game medium as a prize based on the establishment of a payout condition by a game and outputting a detection signal only to the payout control means) For example, the payout control means 301 is provided with a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize games based on the input of the detection signal from the payout detection means a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). A prize game medium payout signal output means (for example, step S1610 in the payout control microcomputer 370) that outputs to the game control means a prize game medium payout signal (for example, a prize ball 10 count signal) indicating that the medium has been paid out. The game control means includes a payout command command (for example, the number of prize balls) that allows the payout control means to specify the payout number of the prize game medium based on the fact that the payout condition is satisfied. A payout command command transmission means for transmitting a signal (for example, step S371 in the game control microcomputer 560). The portion of the port 0 buffer set in step S344 is output to the output port 0 in step S344) and the payout command specified based on the payout command command (may be immediately before or after the award ball number signal is output) The number of prize game medium determining means (for example, for game control) for determining whether or not the difference between the number and the number of payouts specified by input of the prize game medium payout signal from the payout control means has reached a predetermined threshold value. The portion of the microcomputer 560 that executes step S3747) and the fact that the prize game medium payout is determined to have reached the predetermined threshold value by the prize game medium number determination means indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of the prize game medium. Abnormality notification control means (for example, step S3749 in the game control microcomputer 560 is executed). The part to line. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 560 causes the effect control microcomputer 100 to superimpose and display a prize ball error notification display on the effect display device 9 by transmitting a prize ball error command. The game control microcomputer 560 may perform control to turn on or blink the prize ball error notification lamp. ).

  The gaming machine is provided with a payout means storage case (for example, a payout case 40A) for storing payout means, and the payout means storage case is made of a light shielding material (for example, each case 141 as the payout case 40A). , 142, and 143 may be configured using a light shielding material such as an aluminum material.

  The gaming machine has a game frame (for example, a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a predetermined plate-like body and a plate-like shape attached to the game frame. A game board including various parts attached to the body (for example, a game board 6 which is a structure including a plate-like body and various parts attached to the plate-like body), and provided outside the gaming machine. A signal for outputting information related to the game frame to an external device (for example, a hall computer) (for example, a prize ball information signal or a door opening signal based on a signal from a payout control board 37 described later) and a game board Signals for outputting information (for example, starting port 1 signal based on information from the main board 31 described later, symbol determination frequency 2 signal, symbol determination frequency 1 signal, jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, short time signal, jackpot 4 signals External output means (for example, a part for executing steps S1001 to S1126 in the game control microcomputer 560) that outputs a large jackpot (three signals) using a common external output board (for example, the information terminal board 34). It may be configured.

  The external output means is based on the prize game medium payout signal (for example, a prize ball 10 count signal) output by the payout control means, and provides a prize game medium payout signal (for example, a prize ball information signal, substantially a prize ball information signal). The same signal as the prize ball 10 count signal) may be output.

  The gaming machine has a variable display unit (first special symbol display 8a, second special symbol) that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and an effect symbol) that can be identified. A display device 8b, an effect display device 9), and when the display result of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol), a specific gaming state ( For example, it is a gaming machine that is controlled to a big hit gaming state), and prior decision means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that determines whether or not to obtain a specific display result before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed. And a predetermined timing according to a predetermined order during one variable display based on the determination result of the predetermined determination means). There is a possibility that a specific display result is obtained by changing the notice effect (for example, notice effects A, B, C, D, E, e, notice effects X, Y, Z, z) once or multiple times. The notice effect execution means (for example, steps S846 to S855 in the effect control microcomputer 100) that executes step-up notice effects (for example, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect) for informing in stages. The step-up notice effect is a first step-up notice effect that can execute the first step-up notice effect (for example, the notice effects A, B, C, D, E, e): 126) and a second step-up notice effect different from the first step-up notice effect (for example, a second step capable of executing the notice effects X, Y, Z, z). Up notice effect: see FIG. 127 to FIG. 129), and the notice effect execution means simultaneously executes the first step up notice effect and the second step up notice effect as the step up notice effect in the same period during variable display. (For example, in the example shown in FIG. 119, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be executed simultaneously during the high-speed fluctuation period of the effect symbol. As specific examples, FIGS. 131 and 132 are possible. As shown in FIG. 3, the notice effect A of the first step-up notice effect and the notice effect X of the second step-up notice effect are started simultaneously with the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the effect symbol, and then the notice effect is given in the first step-up notice effect. From A to the notice effect B, while in the second step-up notice effect, the notice effect X changes to the notice effect Y and from the notice effect Y. The notice effects Z and z are changed. ) May be configured.

  The notice effect execution means changes the notice effect in the first step-up notice effect at a predetermined change timing and performs the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect at a timing different from the change timing in the first step-up notice effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 119, the timing of changing from the notice effect A to the notice effect B is different from the timing of changing from the notice effect X to the notice effect Y, and the notice effect B is changed to the notice effect C.) The timing to change and the timing to change from the notice effect Y to the notice effects Z, z are also different, as a specific example, as shown in FIGS. Effect A and notice effect X of the second step-up notice effect are started simultaneously. In the pop-up notice effect, the notice effect A changes to the notice effect B, then in the second step up notice effect, the notice effect X changes to the notice effect Y, and then the notice effect Y changes to the notice effects Z, z. It may be configured as follows.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 1, a prize game medium payout indicating that a predetermined number of prize game media have been paid out based on the fact that the payout control means inputs a detection signal from the payout detection means a predetermined number of times. A prize game medium payout signal output means for outputting a signal to the game control means, wherein the game control means pays out the number of payouts specified by the payout command command based on the transmission of the payout command command and the prize game medium payout from the payout control means Since it is configured to include a prize game medium number determination means for determining whether or not the difference from the number of payouts specified by the input of the signal has reached a predetermined threshold value, the payout control means to the game control means The output frequency of the prize game medium payout signal can be reduced, an increase in the processing load of the payout control means can be prevented, and complication of wiring can be prevented. Also, an abnormality notification for performing control for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of prize game media based on the fact that the game control means has judged that the prize game medium number judgment means has reached a predetermined threshold value. Since it is configured to include the control means, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that illegally pay out premium game media.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 2, a payout means storage case for storing the payout means is provided, and the payout means storage case is constructed using a light shielding material. It is possible to prevent the act of illegally paying out the prize game medium by irradiating the detection means such as the photocoupler with infrared rays, and to further strengthen the anti-fraud measures.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 3, a signal for outputting information relating to the gaming frame and a signal for outputting information relating to the gaming board are commonly used for an external device provided outside the gaming machine. Since the external output means is provided to output using the external output board, the number of boards can be reduced by sharing the external output board, and the cost in the board configuration can be reduced. .

  In the gaming machine according to claim 4, the external output means is configured to output a prize game medium payout signal to the external device based on the prize game medium payout signal output from the payout control means. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to newly provide another premium game medium payout signal in order to output the premium game medium payout signal to both the game control means and the external device. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the need to change the program accompanying the output of the premium game medium payout signal, and to reduce the work load at the program design stage.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 5, there is a possibility that a specific display result is obtained by changing the notice effect one or more times at a predetermined timing according to a predetermined order during one variable display. A step-up notice effect executing means for executing step-up notice effect for informing step by step, the step-up notice effect includes a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect, Since the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect can be executed at the same time during the variable display as the step-up notice effect, a plurality of step-up notice effects (first step) Up notice effect and second step up notice effect) can be executed at the same time to enhance interest. Moreover, even if one step-up notice effect is completed, the player's expectation can be directed to the other step-up notice effect, and the player's expectation can be maintained for a long period of time.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 6, the notice effect execution means changes the notice effect in the first step-up notice effect at a predetermined change timing and a timing different from the change timing in the first step-up notice effect. Since the control to change the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect is executed in the above, the player confirms the plurality of notice effects because the timing of the notice effect change in the plurality of step-up notice effects is different. Thus, it is possible to play a game while expecting the occurrence of a specific gaming state, and it is possible to further improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by complication of the effects due to the plurality of step-up notice effects, and to prevent the effects from being reduced.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front. In the following embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can be applied to other gaming machines such as a parrot machine or a slot machine. .

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The circular display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbols synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas (see symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in FIG. 126, etc.). The display screen of the device 9 may not be fixed, and the three areas of the symbol display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variable display portion) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. The first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14), a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) , A state where the big hit game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying a display result is to stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information) (excluding stop before so-called re-variation). In this embodiment, the variable display start condition is established in the order in which the start prizes are generated regardless of the prizes in the first start prize slot 13 and the second start prize slot 14. The variable display start condition may be established by giving priority to one of winning in the winning opening 13 and winning in the second start winning opening 14. For example, when giving priority to winning in the first start winning opening 13, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and the jackpot game is not executed. For example, even when the second reserved memory number is not zero, the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed until the first reserved memory number becomes zero.

  In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (design) symbol is performed. A first decorative symbol display 9a is provided. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a is composed of two LEDs. The first decorative symbol display 9a is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. In addition, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display of the second decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (for production) is performed. A second decorative symbol display 9b is provided. The second decorative symbol display 9b is composed of two LEDs. The second decorative symbol display 9b is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board.

  The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol display. .

  The variation of the decorative pattern (variable display) is realized by continuing the state where the two LEDs are alternately lit. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display 9a. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display 9b. Synchronous means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the LED on the side that recalls the big hit on the first decorative symbol display 9a remains lit. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the LED on the side that recalls the jackpot on the second decorative symbol display 9b remains lit. The functions of the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b may be realized by the effect display device 9. That is, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be controlled to be variably displayed as images on the display screen of the effect display device 9.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. A game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 14 than the first starting winning port 13. Further, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first decorative symbol display 9a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the starting memory or the starting prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol reservation storage display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second decorative symbol display 9b is a second special symbol reserved memory display 18b comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, the display screen of the effect display device 9 displays an area (hereinafter referred to as a summed pending storage display unit 18c) that displays a total number (total number of pending pending memories) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. .) Is provided. Since the summation pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. In addition, since the 1st special symbol reservation memory display 18a and the 2nd special symbol reservation memory display 18b are provided, the total reservation memory display part 18c does not necessarily need to be provided.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect design as the design of is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a pseudo-series effect or a notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed. Further, in a decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as a blade monoton) 79a, which is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 87 and moves when the motor 87 rotates, below the left and right. 79b is provided. In this embodiment, the blade objects 79a and 79b operate when a notice effect (blade object notice effect) is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, and 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded to the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, every time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Further, in the probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 Opening time and opening times are increased. Even in the short state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) when the symbol variation time is shortened although it is not the probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the game area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the first decorative symbol display 9a displays variable display of the first decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. In other words, the variable display of the first special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second decorative symbol display 9b displays variable display of the second decorative symbol. The effect display device 9 starts variable display of effect symbols. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when it is informed that it is a probable big hit or a probable promotion effect (a special effect indicating promotion to a probable state), the game state is shifted to a high probability state. At the same time, the game ball is controlled to be in a high base state that is controlled so as to make it easier for the game ball to start and win (that is, the execution conditions for variable display in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily established). Transition. In addition, when the gaming state is shifted to the short time state, the state is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state in which a start winning is easily made (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol time-short state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the transition time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened. (In other words, the digestion of the stored memory becomes faster), and as a result, it is easier to start a winning and the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it becomes easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short state and special symbol short state). Transition to a state).

  Next, the structure of the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a variable display control unit 49 including an effect control board on which an effect control microcomputer for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, a game control microcomputer, and the like are mounted. Various game boards such as a game control board (main board) 31, an audio output board 70, an LED driver board (not shown), and a payout control board 37 on which a payout control microcomputer for performing ball payout control is mounted. Is installed. The game control board 31 is stored in a board storage case.

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a power supply substrate 910 and a touch sensor substrate 91A on which power supply circuits for generating various power supply voltages such as DC30V, DC21V, DC12V, and DC5V are mounted. The power supply board 910 is supplied with the game control board 31 and each electrical component control board (the effect control board 80 and the payout control board 37) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and each electrical component (power is supplied) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A power switch is provided as a power supply permission means for executing or cutting off the power supply to the component operating by the operation. Further, a replaceable fuse is provided inside the power switch (inside the substrate).

  An electrical component control means including an electrical component control microcomputer is mounted on the electrical component control board. The electrical component control means is an electrical component (game device: ball payout device 97, effect display device 9, LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with a command signal (control signal) as a command from the game control means or the like. The light emitter, speaker 27, etc.). Hereinafter, the game control board 31 may be included in the electric component control board for explanation. In that case, the electrical component control means mounted on the electrical component control board includes a game control means and a means for controlling the electrical components provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with a command signal from the game control means or the like. Point to each. A board on which a microcomputer other than the game control board 31 is mounted may be referred to as a sub board.

  On the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an information terminal board 34 having various terminals for outputting various information to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed above. The information terminal board 34 is provided with a prize ball information signal terminal for externally outputting a prize ball information signal output every time 10 prize balls are paid out, for example. In this embodiment, the information terminal board 34 is installed in the game frame. However, the information terminal board 34 is installed in a board storage case that covers the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, or on the back side of the effect control board. Installed on the front surface (front surface when the gaming machine is viewed from the back side) or on the surface of the cover that covers the effect control board 80 (attached to the left end of the gaming machine when viewed from the back side so that it can be opened and closed) For example, the information terminal board 34 may be installed on a member attached to the game board 6 side. By doing so, the wiring removal process can be reduced when the gaming board 6 is removed from the gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, a signal for outputting information relating to the game frame (for example, a prize ball information signal or a door opening signal based on a signal from a payout control board 37 described later) and information relating to the game board 6 are output. Signal (for example, starting port 1 signal based on information from the main board 31 to be described later, symbol determination frequency 2 signal, symbol determination frequency 1 signal, jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, time-short signal, jackpot 4 signal, Are output using a common information terminal board 34.

  The game ball stored in the storage tank 38 passes through a guide rail (not shown), and reaches a ball payout device 97 covered with a payout case 40A through a curve rod. Above the ball payout device 97, a ball break switch 187 is provided as a game medium break detection means. When the ball break switch 187 detects a ball break, the payout operation of the ball payout device 97 stops. The ball break switch 187 is a switch for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the game ball passage, but the ball break detection switch for detecting the shortage of supply balls in the storage tank 38 is also an upstream portion of the guide rail (close to the storage tank 38). Part). When the shortage of balls detection switch detects a shortage of game balls, a supply of gaming balls is performed to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from a supply mechanism provided on the gaming machine installation island.

  When a large number of game balls as prizes based on winning a prize or a game ball based on a ball lending request are paid out and the hitting ball supply tray 3 is full, the game balls are guided to the surplus ball receiving tray 4 through the surplus ball guide passage. When the game ball is further paid out, a sensing lever (not shown) presses a full tank switch 48 (see FIG. 3) as a storage state detection unit, and the full tank switch 48 as a storage state detection unit is turned on. . In this state, the rotation of the payout motor in the ball payout device is stopped, the operation of the ball payout device is stopped, and the driving of the ball hitting device is also stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a door opening sensor 155 for detecting that the glass door frame 2 or the mechanism plate is opened with respect to the front frame of the gaming frame is attached above the gaming frame. .

  FIG. 3 is a front view (FIG. 3 (A)) and a cross-sectional view (FIG. 3 (B)) showing the ball dispensing device 97 covered with the dispensing case 40A. In the ball payout device 97, a payout motor (not shown) using a stepping motor rotates, for example, a cam, thereby paying out one winning ball or one game ball based on a ball lending request. Also, below the ball payout device 97, for example, a payout number count switch 301 using a proximity switch is provided. Each time one game ball falls from the ball payout device 97, the payout number count switch 301 is turned on. That is, the payout number count switch 301 detects a game ball actually paid out from the ball payout device 97. Therefore, the payout control means can count the number of game balls actually paid out by the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301.

  FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a configuration example of the ball dispensing device 97. In this example, a ball dispensing device 97 is formed inside three cases 141, 142, and 143 as the dispensing case 40A. The upper portions of the cases 141 and 142 are provided with holes 170 and 171 communicating with a ball passage (not shown) below the ball break switch 187, and the game balls flow into the ball dispensing device 97 through the holes 170 and 171. .

  The ball payout device 97 includes a payout motor (for example, a stepping motor) 289 serving as a drive source. The rotational force of the payout motor 289 is transmitted to the gear 290 fitted to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 289, and further transmitted to the gear 291 that meshes with the gear 290. A cam 292 having a ball mounting portion is fitted to the central axis of the gear 291. The game balls that have flowed in from the holes 170 and 171 are dropped one by one into the ball passage 293 below the cam 292 by the ball mounting portion of the cam 292.

  Further, the ball payout device 97 is provided with a payout motor position sensor 295 (photo sensor) including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element. The payout motor position sensor 295 is a sensor for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 289 and is used for detecting that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting.

  In general, when paying out a game ball using the ball payout device 97, the payout motor 289 is controlled to rotate by the number of steps for paying out one game ball, and then the payout count is detected by the payout number count switch 301 and then the next payout is detected. Compared with the method of shifting to the payout control for one game ball, the method of setting the number of steps for paying out a predetermined number of game balls in advance and controlling the rotation of the payout motor 289 is more effective. Speed can be improved. When such a latter payout method is used, a payout motor position sensor 295 (photo sensor) for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 289 is provided, so that the payout number is not limited even though the payout motor 289 is rotationally controlled. If the payout cannot be detected by the count switch 301, a ball biting error has occurred or an emptying error has occurred (when the payout count switch 301 cannot detect a payout despite rotating the sprocket). It is possible to easily distinguish and notify whether or not Therefore, an appropriate response can be taken depending on whether the game clerk or the like is a ball biting error or an empty cutting error.

  In this embodiment, the ball payout device 97 is configured to perform both the prize ball payout and the ball lending, but the ball payout device that performs the prize ball payout and the ball payout device that performs the ball lending are separately provided. May be provided. When separately provided, the payout means is composed of a ball payout device for paying out a prize ball and a ball payout device for lending a ball. Further, for example, the configuration may be such that the prize ball payout and the ball lending are separated by changing the rotation direction of the cam or sprocket, or the ball payout device 97 exemplified in the present embodiment (the cam is rotated by the motor). The present invention can be applied to any structure other than the structure).

  In this embodiment, each of the cases 141, 142, and 143 as the payout case 40A is manufactured using a light shielding material such as an aluminum material. Each of the cases 141, 142, and 143 as the dispensing case 40A is not limited to an aluminum material, and may be made of, for example, a non-transparent synthetic resin material as long as it can shield infrared rays. By doing so, it is made impossible to illegally irradiate infrared rays from the outside to the light receiving element inside the ball dispensing device 97. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally paying out a prize ball by irradiating a light receiving element such as a photocoupler provided in the ball dispensing device 97 with infrared rays, and to further strengthen the countermeasure against fraud. can do.

  For example, during the rotating operation of the payout motor, the light receiving element of the payout motor position sensor 295 (photo sensor) is improperly irradiated with infrared rays to erroneously detect that it is in a ball-engaged state, and frequently releases the ball-engaged state. By doing so, there is a case where an illegal act is attempted to pay out as many prize balls as the ball biting release operation. In such a case, a general gaming machine recognizes that it is a simple ball biting error, and automatically recovers after about two minutes even if no operation such as pressing the error release switch is performed after the ball biting release operation. It is difficult to recognize that cheating has been done. In this embodiment, as described later, when such a state is detected, a prize ball error notification display for notifying the occurrence of a prize ball error is superimposed and displayed on the effect display device 9. It is possible to prevent fraudulent behavior that causes the player to pay out a prize ball. Further, as described above, by making the dispensing case 40A using a light shielding material, it becomes difficult to illegally irradiate the light receiving element of the dispensing motor position sensor 295 (photo sensor) with an infrared ray, and anti-tampering measures are taken. Can be made stronger.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. Further, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data according to a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31. Furthermore, via an information terminal board 34 connected to an external device such as a hall computer, an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state (a starting port 1 signal, a symbol determination number 2 signal, which will be described later, a symbol determination) An information output circuit 64 is also mounted on the main board 31 for outputting the number of signals 1 signal, 1 signal per jackpot, 2 signals per jackpot, short time signal, 3 signals per jackpot, 4 signals per jackpot, prize ball information signal, door open signal) to an external device. ing. The information terminal board 34 is installed on the back surface of the gaming machine and is connected only to the main board 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Upon receiving the effect control command, display control is performed on the first decorative symbol display unit 9a and the second decorative symbol display unit 9b that variably display the decorative symbol, and the effect display device 9 that variably displays the effect symbol.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 37 and the ball payout device 97. As shown in FIG. 6, the payout control board 37 includes a payout control microcomputer 370 including an payout control CPU 371 (an example of an electric component control microcomputer that controls an electrically driven electric component). Has been. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 is a one-chip microcomputer and incorporates at least a RAM. The payout control CPU 371, the RAM (not shown), the ROM (not shown) storing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control means. That is, the payout control means is realized by a payout control CPU 371, a payout control microcomputer 370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I / O port. The I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 370.

  The detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is input to the I / O port 372e of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. The detection signal of the full switch 48 is input to the I / O port 372 f of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. The detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is input to the I / O port 372 f of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. The payout number count switch 301 is a switch that detects a game ball paid out based on a winning and a game ball paid out based on a ball lending request from the card unit 50, and outputs a detection signal. A detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 295 is input to the I / O port 372e of the payout control board 37 via the relay board 72. The payout motor 289 is provided in the ball payout device 97 and rotates to pay out payout game balls stored on the back surface of the game machine. The payout motor position sensor 295 is a sensor composed of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 289, and is used to detect the rotation of the sprocket by the payout motor 289. In this embodiment, the payout motor position sensor 295 is also used for detecting that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. In the payout control microcomputer 370 mounted on the payout control board 37, the detection signal from the ball break switch 187 indicates a full ball state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates a full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped. Furthermore, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates a full tank state, the ball launching from the ball striking device is stopped. Note that even when the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 indicates a full state, the ball firing from the ball striking device may not be stopped. When the signal line from the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to the ball hitting device, the game control microcomputer 560 stops the ball shot from the ball hitting device. Also good.

  When there is a winning game ball at the winning opening, a prize ball number signal (payout number data) indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a prize ball number signal are fetched from the output circuit 67 of the main board 31 as a payout command signal. A prize ball REQ signal (capture request signal) requesting (reception) is output (transmitted). Specifically, it is turned on. The award ball number signal is composed of 4-bit data (binary 4-digit data) and is output by four signal lines. Note that the on state of the signal, that is, the output state is a state where the signal is significant, and turning on means that the signal receiving side is instructed to start some processing based on the signal. To do. For example, when the award ball number signal indicating the award ball number and the award ball REQ signal are turned on, the payout control microcomputer 370 is instructed to recognize the award amount indicated by the award ball number signal. Means that. Alternatively, the signal may be turned on by outputting a signal, and the signal may be turned off by stopping the signal output. Alternatively, the on state and the off state may be switched by outputting a signal.

  The prize ball REQ signal and the prize ball number signal are input to the I / O port 372e via the input circuit 373A. When the payout control microcomputer 370 receives the prize ball number signal via the I / O port 372e, the payout control microcomputer 370 controls to drive the ball payout device 97 to pay out the number of game balls indicated by the prize ball number signal. The prize ball REQ signal and the prize ball number signal correspond to a payout command signal for designating the number of payouts.

  Also, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 372c. A detection signal from an error release switch 375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 372f of the payout control board 37. The error cancel switch 375 is used to cancel the error state by software reset.

  Further, a drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the payout motor 289 is transmitted to the payout motor 289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 97 via the output port 372a and the relay board 72. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 372a, but is not shown in FIG.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 50 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 50 is provided with a usable display lamp, a connecting table direction indicator, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 66 is connected with a power display LED 60, a ball lending LED 61, a ball lending switch 62, and a return switch 63 (not shown in FIG. 1) provided in the vicinity of the hitting ball supply tray 3. .

  A card lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 62 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 63 has been operated are provided to the card unit 50 from the interface board 66 in accordance with the player's operation. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating a prepaid card balance and a ball lending display signal are given from the card unit 50 to the interface board 66. Between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 372f and the output port 372d. An interface board 66 is interposed between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37 via the interface board 66 as shown in FIG.

  A card lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 62 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 63 has been operated are provided to the card unit 50 from the interface board 66 in accordance with the player's operation. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating a prepaid card balance and a ball lending display signal are given from the card unit 50 to the interface board 66. Between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 372f and the output port 372d. An interface board 66 is interposed between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 50 and the payout control board 37 via the interface board 66 as shown in FIG.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 50 and, upon detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 50, drives the payout motor 289 to give a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 370 causes the EXS signal to the card unit 50 to fall. Thereafter, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 50 is not in the ON state, the winning ball payout control is executed when a payout command signal is received from the game control means.

  In this embodiment, the case where the card unit 50 is installed adjacent to the gaming machine as a separate body from the gaming machine is taken as an example, but the card unit 50 may be integrated with the gaming machine. . Further, the present invention can be applied even in the case where game balls corresponding to the amount of money are lent out in accordance with coin insertion.

  Further, a detection signal from a door opening sensor 155 (not shown in FIG. 1) for detecting the open state of the game frame is input to the payout control board 37. In the payout control board 37, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 155 is not input to the payout control microcomputer 370 but is output to the main board 31 via the output circuit 373B. Note that the signal may be output to the main board 31 without going through the output circuit 373B. Alternatively, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 155 may be input to the dispensing control microcomputer 370, and the door opening signal may be output to the main board 31 via the dispensing control microcomputer 370. Further, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs signals corresponding to detection signals of the full switch 48, the ball break switch 187, and the payout number count switch 301 to the main board 31 via the output port 372b and the output circuit 373B. However, the detection signals of the full tank switch 48, the ball break switch 187 and the payout count switch 301 that are input to the payout control microcomputer 370 are branched at the payout control board 37, and the branched detection signal is output to the output circuit 373B. Via the main board 31. In such a configuration, the payout control microcomputer 370 need not output from the output port 372b signals corresponding to the detection signals of the full tank switch 48, the ball break switch 187, and the payout number count switch 301.

  FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 7, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 7 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal going from the relay board 77 to the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. The effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating the blade objects 79 a and 79 b via the output port 106.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED. Further, an electric current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time-series manner in a predetermined period (for example, a changing period of the effect design).

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the operation of the movable member. The example shown in FIG. 8 shows the operation of the movable member 78 when the re-change effect (pseudo-continuous effect) in the effect display device 9 is executed. In the re-change effect, the change of the effect symbol is executed for a predetermined period after the change of the effect symbol is started from the state shown in FIG. (Refer to (B) and (C)), when the predetermined period elapses, the left, middle and right effect symbols are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 8D). When the predetermined temporary stop period elapses, the left middle right effect symbol re-variates (see FIG. 8E), and when the predetermined re-variation period elapses, the left middle right effect symbol is finally stopped (confirmed). (See FIG. 8F). In the example shown in FIG. 8, the movable member 78 operates (operates so as to return to the original position (outside the display screen) after entering the display screen of the effect display device 9) during the first variation period, and the first variation occurs. The movable member 78 also operates during the subsequent re-variation period. In addition, the example shown in FIG. 8 is an example when one temporary stop is performed. Thereafter, after the reach effect is executed, the left, middle and right effect symbols are finally stopped (confirmed). Here, it has been described that reach is reached when the re-changing effect ends, but when the re-changing effect ends, the effect symbol may not be reached but may finally stop.

  FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the information terminal board 34. In the example shown in FIG. 9, a signal is input to the information terminal board 34 from the main board 31 via the cable 343 and the connector 341. A signal input via the cable 343 is output to, for example, a hall computer via the driver circuit 345, the connector 347, and the cable 349. In this embodiment, through the information terminal board 34, a starting port 1 signal, a symbol determination number 1 signal, a symbol determination number 2 signal, a big hit 1 signal, a big hit 2 signal, a big hit 3 signal, a big hit 4 signal, A short signal, a prize ball information signal (in this embodiment, a signal output based on detection of prize ball payout 10 times), and a door opening signal are output to a hall computer or the like. Not all these signals are externally output from the game control microcomputer 560 via the information terminal board 34, but the prize ball information signal and the door opening signal are not transmitted via the game control microcomputer 560. It may be branched on the main board 31 and input to the information terminal board 34. Alternatively, only one of the winning ball information signal and the door opening signal may be branched on the main board 31 and input to the information terminal board 34 without using the game control microcomputer 560. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the information output processing (see step S30) for external output performed by the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the signal from the payout control board 37 is input in addition to the signal from the main board 31 and is output to the hall computer, the information terminal board 34 receives the signal from the main board 31. A connector or driver for outputting a signal from the payout control board 37 to the hall computer may be provided separately from a connector and a driver circuit for inputting a signal and outputting the signal externally. In this case, for example, the information terminal board 34 receives from the payout control board 37 a prize ball information signal (in this embodiment, a signal output based on the detection of prize ball payout 10 times) or a door opening signal. Input and output to hall computer. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily determine whether the part is related to the signal from the main board 31 or the part from the payout control board 37.

  10 and 11 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of output port assignment in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 10, the output port 0 is an output port for a payout command signal (award ball number signal, award ball REQ signal) and a power supply confirmation signal transmitted to the payout control board 37. The output port 1 is an output port for an effect control command transmitted to the effect control board 80. The high level “1” of the prize ball number signal corresponds to the on state, the high level “1” of the power confirmation signal corresponds to the on state (the state where power is supplied), and the high level “1” of the effect control command. “1” corresponds to the ON state. Further, the low level “0” of the prize ball REQ signal corresponds to an ON state (a state where a payout request is made).

  Further, from the output port 2, a solenoid (large winning opening door solenoid) 21 for opening and closing a variable winning ball apparatus 20 for opening and closing a large winning opening and a solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid) for opening and closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are opened. ) A drive signal for 16 and an effect control INT signal (strobe signal) for the effect control command transmitted to the effect control board 80 are output. The effect control INT signal is a signal for instructing the effect control means to take in the 8-bit data of the effect control command.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the output ports 3 and 4 are output ports for signals output to the information terminal board 34 (via the hall computer). From the output port 3, a start port 1 signal, a symbol determination frequency 2 signal, a symbol determination frequency 1 signal, a big hit 1 signal, a big hit 2 signal, a short time signal, a big hit 4 signal, and a big hit 3 signal are output. The signal output from the output port 3 is a control information signal generated during the execution of the game control process.

  In addition, a prize ball information signal and a door opening signal are output from the output port 4. In this embodiment, the award ball information signal is input from the payout control board 37 to the main board 31 based on the fact that 10 payouts are detected using the payout number count switch 301. Signal (prize ball 10 count signal described later). The door opening signal is a signal input from the payout control board 37 to the main board 31 based on the detection of the open state of the game frame by the door opening sensor 155.

  The output ports 0 to 4 are a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, the time when the signal is in the ON state corresponds to the state where the “signal is being output”.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 12, the bits 0 to 7 of the input port 0 include the count switch 23, the gate switch 32a, the winning port switches 39a, 30a, 29a, 33a, the first starting port switch 13a, and the second starting port, respectively. A detection signal of the switch 14a is input.

  In addition, the winning ball 10 count signal, the door opening signal, the full tank signal, the ball running out signal, and the payout error signal from the payout control board 37 are input to bits 0 to 4 of the input port 1, respectively. The high level “1” of the winning ball 10 count signal corresponds to the on state (the state where the payout number count switch 301 is turned on). A high level “1” of the door opening signal corresponds to an ON state (a state where the door opening sensor 155 is ON). The high level “1” of the full tank signal corresponds to the on state (the state in which the full switch 48 is turned on). The high level “1” of the ball-out signal corresponds to the on state (the state in which the ball-out switch 187 is on). A high level “1” of the payout error signal corresponds to an ON state (a state in which a payout error has occurred).

  The bits 0 and 1 of the input port 2 are supplied with a power-off signal from the power supply board and a clear switch detection signal (clear signal), respectively. The power-off signal is a signal that is output when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the predetermined voltage. The clear switch is a switch that can be operated by a game clerk or the like, and is a switch that is operated when the RAM 55 is to be initialized. The winning ball BUSY signal from the payout control board 37 is input to bit 2 of the input port 2. As will be described later, the prize ball BUSY signal is set to a high level (on state) when the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms the on state of the prize ball REQ signal, and is turned off after a predetermined period. It is. That is, it corresponds to an acceptance confirmation signal for the prize ball REQ signal. Therefore, the state in which the prize ball BUSY signal is OFF corresponds to a state of waiting for a prize ball number command reception. The prize ball BUSY signal may be output when the prize ball is paid out. The input ports 0 to 2 are a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, the time when the signal is in the ON state corresponds to the state where the “signal is input”.

  Note that a logic opposite to the “logic” shown in FIGS. 10 to 12 may be used. For example, an input signal in which 1 is on may be an input signal in which 0 is on. 10 to 12 are ports that can be accessed at one time, that is, ports that can be accessed by the same interrupt.

  FIG. 13 is a circuit diagram showing the internal configuration of the information terminal board. In the information terminal board 34 shown in FIG. 13, the left connector CN corresponds to a connector for connecting a cable for transmitting a signal from the main board 31, and the right connectors CN1 to CN10 are signals to the hall computer. It corresponds to a connector for connecting a cable for transmitting the signal. Semiconductor relays (PhotoMOS relays) PC1 to PC10 correspond to driver circuits.

  When the cable from the main board 31 is connected to the connector CN, various signals are input to the information terminal board 34 from the main board 31 (game control microcomputer 560). Specifically, the start port 1 signal is input to the terminal “2” of the connector CN, the symbol determination frequency 2 signal is input to the terminal “3” of the connector CN, and the symbol determination frequency 1 is input to the terminal “4” of the connector CN. A signal is input, a jackpot signal is input to the terminal “5” of the connector CN, a jackpot signal of 2 is input to the terminal “6” of the connector CN, and a time reduction signal is input to the terminal “7” of the connector CN. The jackpot 4 signal is input to the terminal “8” of the connector CN, the jackpot 3 signal is input to the terminal “9” of the connector CN, the prize ball information signal is input to the terminal “10” of the connector CN, and the terminal of the connector CN A door open signal is input to “11”.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the information terminal board 34, the signal line of the reference potential is connected to the terminal “1” of the connector CN, the signal line branches, and the input terminals “1” of the respective semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10. "It is connected to the. The signal lines connected to the terminals “2” to “11” of the connector CN are connected to the input terminals “2” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 via the 1 KΩ resistors R1 to R10, respectively. The signal lines connected to the output terminals “4” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 are connected to the terminals “1” of the connectors CN1 to CN10, respectively. The signal lines connected to the output terminals “3” of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 are connected to the terminals “2” of the connectors CN1 to CN10, respectively.

  In the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10, when a signal current flows through the input terminal, the light emitting element (LED) on the input side emits light. The emitted light is applied to the photoelectric element (solar cell) provided opposite to the LED through the transparent silicon. The photoelectric element that has received the light is exchanged for voltage according to the amount of light, and this voltage passes through the control circuit to charge the MOSFET gate of the output section. When the MOSFET gate voltage supplied from the photoelectric element reaches the set voltage value, the MOSFET becomes conductive and turns on the load. When the signal current at the input terminal is cut off, the light emitting element (LED) stops emitting light. When the light emission of the LED stops, the voltage of the photoelectric element decreases, and when the voltage supplied from the photoelectric element decreases, the gate load of the MOSFET is rapidly discharged by the control circuit. With this control circuit, the MOSFET is turned off and the load is turned off.

  By the operation of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 as described above, signals input from the input side connector CN are transmitted to the output side connectors CN1 to CN10 and output to the hall computer. Specifically, a start port 1 signal is output from the connector CN1, a symbol determination frequency 2 signal is output from the connector CN2, a symbol determination frequency 1 signal is output from the connector CN3, and a jackpot 1 signal is output from the connector CN4. Connector CN5 outputs 2 jackpot signals, connector CN6 outputs a time reduction signal, connector CN7 outputs 4 jackpot signals, connector CN8 outputs 3 jackpot signals, and connector CN9 outputs a prize ball information signal A door opening signal is output from the connector CN10.

  As described above, by providing the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 on the information terminal board 34, signal input from the outside to the inside of the gaming machine can be prevented, and as a result, illegal acts can be reliably prevented. . In the above example, the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10 are provided on the information terminal board 34. However, other relay elements such as a mechanical relay may be used instead of the semiconductor relays PC1 to PC10.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM 55 is accessible. (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the on-state is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for areas that may be initialized among the work areas is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure restoration designation command (power failure restoration 1 designation command) as an initialization command at the time of power supply restoration to the effect control board 80 (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S14.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area in the RAM 55 (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, an initial value is set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the effect control board 80 (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized. Display, that is, initialization notification. In the initialization process, the CPU 56 also transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation (demonstration) command.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the random R value.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S15). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern or the like, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. . The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol (normal symbol determination random number generation counter). It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as a variable display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game device control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for jackpot determination or the like is one round (minimum value that can be taken by random numbers) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S35 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power monitoring circuit 920 mounted on the power board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a are input via the input driver circuit 58, These state determinations are performed (switch processing: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S33 and S34. Execute control.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes an input port data confirmation process for transmitting the input data of the input port 1 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when the input data of the input port 1 (see FIG. 12) changes (step). S23).

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determining a normal winning symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S24). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S25 and S26).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S27). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S30).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the count switch 23 and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, and 39a. Execute (Step S31). Specifically, payout control is performed in response to detection of a winning based on one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23 and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a being turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of winning balls is output to a payout control microcomputer mounted on the substrate 37. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S32: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, if the variation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56, for example, every 0.2 seconds passes. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol display unit 8a and the second special symbol display unit 8b Variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S34). For example, when the start flag for normal symbol variation is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the normal symbol variation rate every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S35), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S34 (excluding step S30) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing pseudo consecutive chance eyes. In the “pseudo-ream” specific effect, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9, the pseudo-ream chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. The effect symbols constituting any of the above are temporarily stopped and displayed. The “left symbol” is an effect symbol displayed (stop display or temporary stop display) in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the “middle symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C. The “right symbol” is an effect symbol displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of effect symbols included in the special combination.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effect symbols that do not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) when the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Depending on the reach state, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not become reach may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Or the reach effect is not executed, and the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R on the effect display device 9.

  When “5”, which is a small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “accurate” in the effect display device 9. After the effect symbols are variably displayed as in a case, a predetermined non-reach combination (for example, the stop symbols in the “left” and “right” symbol display areas 9L and 9R do not match) In some cases, the stop symbol that is displayed is stopped or a stop symbol that is a predetermined reach combination is stopped and displayed. A display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5” as a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, and a variable display mode of “small hit”. .

  FIG. 17 shows the variation patterns of the production symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of the production symbols is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variable display result is an outlier design. It is explanatory drawing which shows. As shown in FIG. 17, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-5 and non-reach PB1- are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-6, super PB3-1 to super PB3- 3. Fluctuation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 17, about the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-5 which is used when not reaching and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed twice. Re-variation is performed twice or three times for a variation pattern that is used for reaching and accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect.

  FIG. 18 is an explanatory view exemplifying a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance in response to the case where the variable display result is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. As shown in FIG. 18, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8 and super PA4-1 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -Super PA4-6, Super PA5-1 to Super PA5-3, Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-3, Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-3, Super PD1-1 and Super PD1-2, Super PE1-1 Also, variation patterns of super PE1-2, special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, special PG2-1 to special PG2-3 are prepared. As shown in FIG. 18, re-variation is performed twice, three times, or four times for a variation pattern that is used when it is not abrupt and has a pseudo-continuous effect. For the variation pattern of the special PG1-3 used in the case of suddenness and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, re-variation is performed twice or three times.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(2-1) Random 2-1 (MR2-1): Determines the type of jackpot (probability big hit, sudden probability change big hit, normal big hit) (for jackpot type determination)
(2-2) Random 2-2 (MR2-2): Determines whether or not to reach (for reach determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(6) Random 6 (MR6): Determine the initial value of random 5 (for determining the initial value of random 5)
(7) Random 7 (MR7): Determines the pattern of pseudo-continuous production (for determining pseudo-continuous pattern)

  In step S24 in the game control process shown in FIG. 15, the game control microcomputer 560 generates (2-1) a big hit type determination random number and (5) a normal symbol determination random number. The counter is incremented (added by 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2-2, random 3, random 4, random 7) or initial value random numbers (random 6). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIGS. 20A and 20B are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal big hit determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a positive change big hit determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 20 (A) and each numerical value described in FIG. 20 (B) are set in the normal jackpot determination table. Each numerical value described in the right column of (A) and each numerical value described in FIG. 20 (B) are set. The numerical values described in FIGS. 20A and 20B are the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value. Hereinafter, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value may be collectively expressed as “big hit determination value”.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number is shown in FIGS. If it matches any of the big hit judgment values shown in B), it is decided to make a big hit (probability big hit, normal big hit or sudden big hit) or small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B indicates the probability (ratio) of big hit or small hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, but the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display. It may also be determined whether the stop symbol in the symbol display 8b is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol.

  FIG. 20C is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 54. When it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as “normal jackpot”, “based on the random number (random 2-1) for determining the jackpot type. This table is referred to in order to determine either “probable big hit” or “surprise big hit”. The big hit type determination table 131 is a numerical value to be compared with the value of the random 2-1, and is a determination value corresponding to each of "normal big hit", "probable big hit", and "sudden big hit" (big hit type determination value) Is set. When the random value 2-1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  FIGS. 21A to 21F and 22G are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 3). Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. In other words, the game state is selected according to whether the game state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short time state, and the determination result of the jackpot type.

  In each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G, a random number for random variation type determination (random 3) is selected according to whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “probability variation”, or “probability”. ) And a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-6, super CB3-1, super CB3-2, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2. A determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of special CB4-1, special CB4-2, special CC4-1, and special CC4-2 is set.

  For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 21A used when the big hit type is “normal” and the big hit type is “ 21. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 21B used in the case of “probability variation” is different in the allocation of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the variation value type of the super CA 3-3 is determined. The judgment value is not assigned. Further, in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, no determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-4 is determined. Judgment value is assigned.

  As described above, when the gaming state is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type in the gaming state (when in the normal state) When the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D to 132F (selected when the probability variation state is selected) and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A, 132B and 132G (selected during the short time state) are compared, Accordingly, the assignment of the judgment value to each variation pattern type is different. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Accordingly, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type judgment tables 132C, 132F, 132G used when the big hit type is “surprise”, for example, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-1, special CB4-2, When the big hit type such as special CC4-1 or special CC4-2 is other than “surprise”, the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type to which the determination value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, when the control is made to the 2 round big hit state, the variation pattern type is different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state. be able to.

  When the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 21A used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short time state. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132E shown in FIG. 21D used when the gaming state is a probable variation state, the determination values are assigned to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2. Is different. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, and in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D, a determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3. It is not done. As described above, when the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132D (“normal”) selected according to the gaming state. ), The big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132E (selected when “probability change”), and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C, 132F and 132G (selected when “probability”) are compared. Depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short time state, or a probable variation state, the determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type differently. In addition, determination values may be assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short-time state or a probable variation state, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied. it can.

  FIGS. 23A to 23C are explanatory diagrams showing small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133 </ b> A to 133 </ b> C stored in the ROM 54. In the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the variation pattern type is based on a random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected, for example, according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. That is, the game state is selected depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) value for variation pattern type determination, and includes special CA4-1, special CB4-1, The judgment value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of the special CC4-1 is included.

  The special CA4-1 variation pattern types to which the determination values are assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133A shown in FIG. 23A include the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. The variation pattern type of the special CB4-1 to which the determination value is assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133B shown in FIG. 23B is the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132F shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. The variation pattern type of the special CC 4-1 to which the determination value is assigned in the small hit variation pattern type determination table 133C shown in FIG. 23C is the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132G shown in FIG. Is also assigned a decision value. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA 4-1, the special CB 4-1, and the special CC 4-1 are common variations when the big hit type is “surprise” and when the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C shown in FIG. 21 (C), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132F shown in FIG. 21 (F), and FIG. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132G shown in G) is set so as to include a variation pattern type that is common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”.

  24A to 24C are explanatory diagrams showing reach determination tables 134A to 134C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not to change the variable display state of the effect symbol to the reach state when it is determined that the variable display result is “off”. -2) is a table referred to for determination based on the above. Each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected according to a table selection rule as shown in FIG. That is, the game state is selected depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state. Each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2), and is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1. -1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2 determination results indicating that the reach state is not reached, reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 The determination value corresponding to any of the determination results indicating the reach state is included.

  For example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 24A, the value in the range of “1” to “204” is set to the non-reach HA 1-1 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “0”. Assigned, a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “1”, a value in the range of “1” to “217” that is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-2. It has been. A value in the range of “1” to “220”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “2”, is non-reach. Allocated to HA1-3. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”, “1” to “1”, which are larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-3. 230 ”is assigned to non-reach HA1-4. Corresponding to the case where the number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”, “1” to “235”, which are larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-4. A range determination value is assigned to non-reach HA 1-5. With such a setting, when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “3”), it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state as compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio is lower. If the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “reach”. When the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  FIGS. 25A to 25C are explanatory diagrams showing reach variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> A to 135 </ b> C stored in the ROM 54. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> A to 135 </ b> C indicate the change pattern type based on the random number (random 3) for determining the change pattern type when it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is set to the reach state. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table in accordance with a determination result indicating that the reach state is set such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. The That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, and for reach according to the determination result indicating reach HB2-1. The variation pattern type determination table 135B is selected as the use table, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135C is selected as the use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach HC2-1 is selected. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C has a reach determination result indicating whether the reach state is the reach HA2-1 to the reach HA2-3, the reach HB2-1, or the reach HC2-1. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) value for determining the variation pattern type, which is normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2. Data (determination value) for determining one of the fluctuation pattern types.

  For example, in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 25A, the values (determination values) in the range of “1” to “128” correspond to the determination result indicating that the reach HA2-1 is set. It is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, and other values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 and super CA2-3. Corresponding to the determination result to reach reach 2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. Further, in response to the determination result that the reach HA2-3 is selected, a value in the range of “1” to “182” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the normal CA2-1. The reach HA 2-1 is compared with the reach determination random number (random 2-2) according to the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. The judgment value to be assigned is assigned. A determination value is assigned to the reach HA 2-2 corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “1” or “2”. The reach HA2-3 is assigned a determination value corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “3” to “8”. With these settings, the fluctuation pattern of the normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “1”) compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The rate determined for the type increases. And, the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the “normal” reach effect is shorter than the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the reach effect other than “normal”. If the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  26A to 26C are explanatory diagrams showing non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C indicate the variation pattern based on the random number (random 3) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display state of the effect symbol is not set to the reach state. It is a table referred in order to determine the type as one of a plurality of types. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2, and the like. The table is selected as a use table according to the determination result indicating that the reach state is not set. That is, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, and the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and the non-reach HB1-2. Accordingly, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the use table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the use table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. The In each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, the determination result indicating that the non-reach state is not set is non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1. -1 or non-reach HC1-2, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 3) value for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether it is non-reach HC1-2, and non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach It includes data (determination value) corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3.

  FIGS. 27, 28A and 28B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 4). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either normal CA3-1 or super CA3-2 to super CA3-6, and the variation pattern type is selected as the super table. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination result to select one of CB3-1 to super CB3-2, and the variation pattern type is special CA4-1, special CA4-2, special CB4-. 1, the hit variation pattern determination table 137C is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that any one of the special CB4-2, the special CC4-1, and the special CC4-2 is selected. Each of the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 4) value according to the variation pattern type. Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” or “small hit” is included.

  FIGS. 29 and 30 are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B determine the variation pattern according to whether or not to reach the reach state and the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “out of range”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 4). Each deviation variation pattern determination table 138A, 138B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, non-reach CB1-1 to non-reach CB1-3, non-reach CC1-1 to non-reach CC1-3. Accordingly, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as the usage table, and the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, and super CB2-2. Depending on the determination result, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is selected as the usage table.

  The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type. And data (determination value) for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display mode is “non-reach”. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138B is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type. And data (determination value) for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display mode is “reach”.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A shown in FIG. 29, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach PA1-5, etc., corresponding to non-reach variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 and non-reach CC1-3. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern (see FIG. 17) for executing the specific effect. With such a setting, non-reach PA1-4 to non-reach corresponds to the determination that the variable display result of the effect symbol is “out” and the determination that the variable display state of the effect symbol is not the reach state. Making a decision to be one of the fluctuation patterns of reach PA1-5 and executing a specific effect (effect of non-reach PA1-4 ("slip") or effect of non-reach PA1-5 ("pseudo-run")) Can do.

  Also, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PB1-1 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CB1-1, and assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PB1-2 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type of non-reach CB1-2. It has been.

  Then, with respect to the variation pattern types of non-reach CA1-4 including non-reach PA1-5, a random number (random 3 for determining the variation pattern type) in non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. ) Is compared with the non-reach HA1-1, and a determination value in the range of “217” to “241” is assigned to the non-reach HA1-1, and “230” is assigned to the non-reach HA1-2. ”To“ 241 ”is assigned, and determination values in the range“ 231 ”to“ 241 ”are assigned to the non-reach HA1-3, and“ 237 ”to the non-reach HA1-4. A determination value in the range of “241” is assigned, and a determination value in the range of “237” to “241” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-5. Further, for the non-reach HA 1-1, the reach determination random number (random 2-2) corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is “0” in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. A determination value in the range of “1” to “204” is assigned. For the non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the reserved storage number corresponds to “1” and is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number for determination of reach (random 2-2). Thus, determination values in the range of “1” to “217” are assigned. For the non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, the reserved storage number corresponds to “2” and is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number for reach determination (random 2-2). Thus, determination values in the range of “1” to “220” are assigned. For the non-reach HA1-4, in the reach determination table 134A, the numbers to be compared with the values of the random numbers for reach determination (random 2-2) corresponding to the numbers of reserved storage “3” and “4” ( Determination value) and a determination value in the range of “1” to “230” is assigned, and for the non-reach HA1-4, the reserved storage number is “5” to “8” in the reach determination table 134A. Is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of a random number for reach determination (random 2-2), and a determination value in the range of “1” to “235” is assigned. Accordingly, when the number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the number of reserved memories is “0”. . Further, when the number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”, compared with the case where the number of reserved memories is “0” or “1” or “2”, non-reach CA1-4. The ratio determined for the variation pattern type becomes lower. Further, when the number of reserved memories is “5” to “8”, non-reach PA 1-5 (including “pseudo-continuous”) is compared with the case where the number of reserved memories is “0” to “4”. The ratio determined for the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 including the lower becomes lower.

  In addition, in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C shown in FIG. 26C, the reach type is not the non-reach CC1-3 variation pattern type including the non-reach PA1-5 (see FIG. 29). In the case of the reach HC1-1, a determination value in the range of “235” to “241” (a numerical value to be compared with the random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern type) is assigned, and the reach type is non-reach. In the case of HC1-2, determination values in the range of “234” to “241” are assigned. Further, in the reach determination table 134C shown in FIG. 24C, the determination value (random number for reach determination (random 2-2) assigned to the non-reach HC 1-1 when the reserved storage number is “2” or more. ) And the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HC 1-2 when the reserved storage number is “0” or “1” (“1”). ”To“ 231 ”). In the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C shown in FIG. 26C, in the case of non-reach HC1-1, the non-reach HC1 rather than the determination value assigned to the non-reach CC1-3 variation pattern type. In the case of -2, since the number of determination values assigned to the variation pattern type of the non-reach CC1-3 is smaller, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or more, the number of reserved memories is " Compared to the case of “0” or “1”, the ratio determined for the variation pattern type of non-reach CC1-3 including non-reach PA1-5 (including “pseudo-continuous”) is lower.

  Note that when the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A illustrated in FIG. 29 is used, only non-reach PA1-5 can be selected as a variation pattern including “pseudo-continuous”, but a plurality of types including “pseudo-continuous” can be selected. The shift variation pattern determination table 138A may be configured so that the variation pattern can be selected.

  In the variation pattern illustrated in FIG. 17, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the specific effect is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-2. Is 3.75 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “sliding” specific effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the non-reach in which the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. The variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of PA1-5 is 16.70 seconds. That is, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is longer than the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern in which the specific effect is not performed. When the number of reserved memories is “1” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the specific effect is lower than in the case of “0”. In addition, when the number of reserved storage is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the number is less than “3”. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number.

  In the deviation variation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. 30, the variation pattern for executing the “normal” reach effect such as the normal PA2-1 to the normal PA2-4 corresponding to the variation pattern type of the normal CA2-1. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 4) value for variation pattern determination is assigned. Corresponding to the case of the change pattern type of super CA2-2, the change pattern for executing reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-3, or the reach effect such as super PA3-4 to super PA3-6. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of a random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned to the variation pattern for executing α2. Corresponding to the case where the variation pattern type is Super CA2-3 or Super CB2-1, a random number (random 4 for determining the variation pattern) is added to the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 such as Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-3. ) Is assigned a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared.

  Further, for example, as for the variation patterns for executing the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect, such as the super-PA 3-3, super-PA 3-6, and super-PB 3-3 variation patterns, after the pseudo-continuous variation is performed, The variation pattern type is classified according to the type of effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state becomes the reach state. That is, since the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-3 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, this corresponds to the case of the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table 138B shown in FIG. Thus, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 4) for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-6 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2, the variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the variation pattern determination table 138B. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of random number (random 4) is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PB3-3 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, the variation pattern type of the super CA2-3 or the super CB2-1 in the outlier variation pattern determination table 138B corresponds to the variation pattern type. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 4) value for variation pattern determination is assigned.

  FIGS. 31 and 32 are explanatory diagrams showing a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 140 stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 31 shows a fluctuation pattern used at the time of a loss, and FIG. 32 shows a fluctuation pattern used at the time of a hit. The pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 140 includes super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, super PB4, which are fluctuation patterns with pseudo-continuous. -3, super PB5-3, and special PG1-3 (see FIGS. 17 and 18) are set. The determination value corresponds to a specific variation pattern. Note that there are a plurality of super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, super PB4-3, super PB5-3, and special PG1-3. There are fluctuation patterns of the number of re-variations, but for non-reach PA1-5, the number of re-variations (number of pseudo-variations) including the initial variation (the first pseudo variation) is only one type of two. No judgment value is assigned. That is, in practice, data related to non-reach PA1-5 is not set in the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 140.

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 33, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Corresponding to the variation pattern XX, respectively). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIGS. 8 and 10, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the production control device 100 controls the first design symbol display unit 9a or the second design design display unit 9b to start the design design variable display. In step 9, control is performed so as to start variable display of effect symbols.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of the big hit game. The production control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the decorative design and the production design in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), so that the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are specified as the display results. It is called a command.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of effect symbols (and decoration symbols) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol and the decorative symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are an effect control command for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of a big hit game or the start of a small hit game (a big hit start designation command or a small hit start designation command: a fanfare designation command). is there. The big hit start designation command or the small hit start designation command includes a big hit start 1 designation command, a big hit start designation 2 designation command, and a small hit / rush start designation command corresponding to the type or small hit. The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of the big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A301 (H) displays a jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game and an effect control command (special jackpot end 1 designation command: ending) that specifies that the jackpot game is a non-probable big hit (usually a big hit) 1 designation command). The command A302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game and specifying that it is a promising big hit (a jackpot end 2 designation command: an ending 2 designation command). is there. Command A303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / probability end designation command: ending 3 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change game.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) for designating that the first starting prize has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that there has been a second start winning. The first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for designating a total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that designates that the total pending storage count is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command, and does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command. When the stored number is subtracted, the combined pending storage number after the subtraction may be designated by a combined pending storage number designation command.

  Command C400 (H) is an effect control command (prize ball error command) that specifies that a prize ball error has occurred. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the count value of the prize ball counter has a predetermined second threshold value based on the prize ball 10 count signal received from the payout control microcomputer 370, as will be described later. If a process for determining whether or not (for example, whether or not it is 50 or less) is performed and it is determined that the count value exceeds a predetermined second threshold value, an illegal act is attempted to pay out a lot of prize balls. It is determined that there is a possibility. For example, during the rotating operation of the payout motor, the light receiving element of the payout motor position sensor 295 (photo sensor) is improperly irradiated with infrared rays to erroneously detect that it is in a ball-engaged state, and frequently releases the ball-engaged state. If an illegal act is attempted to pay out more prize balls by the amount corresponding to the ball biting release operation, the count value of the prize ball counter is increased by increasing the number of receptions of the prize ball 10 count signal. Can exceed the predetermined second threshold value, and it can be determined that there is a possibility that an illegal act to pay out a lot of prize balls has been performed. When the game control microcomputer 560 determines that there is a possibility that such an illegal act has been performed, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to transmit a prize ball error command to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 superimposes and displays on the effect display device 9 a prize ball error notification display for notifying the occurrence of the prize ball error based on the reception of the prize ball error command.

  Command C 401 (H) is an effect control command (prize ball shortage error command) that specifies that a shortage of shortage balls has occurred. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the count value of the prize ball counter has exceeded a predetermined first threshold (for example, whether or not it is 150 or more). If it is determined that the count value has exceeded the predetermined first threshold, it is determined that there is a shortage of prize balls. When the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the prize ball is insufficient, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to transmit a prize ball shortage error command to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 superimposes and displays on the effect display device 9 a prize ball shortage error notification display for notifying the occurrence of a prize ball shortage error based on the reception of the prize ball shortage error command. .

  Command FFYY (H) is an effect control command (input port data designation command) indicating input data of input port 1. YY indicates input data of the input port 1.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 33, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result specifying command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In the example shown in FIG. 33, the variable pattern command and the display result specifying command are displayed in a variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator. The image display device 9 that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol in 8b, and that produces effects in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the effect parts, it is possible not to increase the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Note that the command 8D01 (H) (first symbol variation designation command) and the command 8D02 (H) (second symbol variation designation command) are the first special symbol display 8a by the effect control microcomputer 100. Whether or not the first decorative symbol display 9a that performs variable display of the first decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the symbol is changed by the second special symbol display 8b. It is used to determine whether or not the decorative symbol is changed in the second decorative symbol display unit 9b that performs variable display of the second decorative symbol during the variable display time of the second special symbol.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of EXT data (YY portion) of the command FFYY (H) (input port data designation command). The bit assignment of EXT data is the same as the bit assignment of input port 1 shown in FIG. That is, a payout error designation bit corresponding to the payout error signal is assigned to bit 4 (D4). Bit 3 (D3) is assigned a ball-out error designation bit corresponding to the ball-out error signal. Bit 2 (D2) is assigned a full tank error designation bit corresponding to a full tank error signal. Bit 1 (D1) is assigned a door opening error designation bit corresponding to the door opening / closing signal. A prize ball 10 count designation bit corresponding to the prize ball 10 count signal is assigned to bit 0 (D0). In the example shown in FIG. 34, since bits 5 to 7 of the EXT data of the input port data designation command are unused, the bits indicate information indicating an error determined by the game control microcomputer 560 (for example, In the case where it is configured to determine whether or not an abnormal winning at the big winning opening has occurred, the detection of the count switch 23 even though the occurrence of the abnormal winning, that is, the control for opening the big winning opening is not performed. (Information indicating that the signal is turned on) may be used when transmitting to the production control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S27) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects that a game ball has won the first start port switch 13a or the second start winning port 14 for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning port 13. If the second start port switch 14a is turned on, that is, if a start winning is generated, start port switch passing processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Specifically, the data in the switch-on buffer is read and loaded into a predetermined area of the register or RAM 55, for example. Then, the bitwise AND operation of the loaded contents (loaded data) and C0 (H) is performed, and if the operation result is not 0 (step S311), the start port switch passing process is executed (step S312). . C0 (H) is a value corresponding to the input bit of the detection signal from the first start port switch 13a and the second start port switch 14a of the switch-on buffer. Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of a special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total reserved storage number). The number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. If the count value of the total reserved memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. In the case of a small hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag and the small hit flag are reset when the big hit game or the small hit game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result specifying command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is stepped. Update to a value corresponding to S304 (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped, and the stopped symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. When the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 or 8 in this example) corresponding to step S305 or step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbols and decoration symbols when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for opening the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening open process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting a round display effect control command during the big hit game state or the small hit game to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). It should be noted that the small hit pre-release process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the small hit pre-release process is a process for starting the small hit game.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. A control for transmitting an effect control command for a round display during the small hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming that the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). When all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  36 and 37 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the total number of reserved storage is not 0, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the start winning area 13, 14 is provided in the reserved area (for example, the RAM 55 and the start winning opening 13, 13 is won in the start opening switch passing process in step S312). It is confirmed whether or not the first data among the data set to “first” or “second” is set to “first” (step S52). If it is data indicating “first”, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) is set to “first 1 "is set (step S53). If it is not data indicating “first”, that is, if it is data indicating “second”, data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In the RAM 55, the CPU 56 stores a random number value stored in the storage area (for example, the RAM 55 or the like corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and is read and stored in the start port switch passing process in step S312. Each random number value stored in (5) is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 stores the count value of the total pending storage number counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (step S57), and then decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area (step S61), and executes a jackpot determination module (step S62). The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a jackpot determination value that is determined in advance with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining whether to hit a jackpot or a small hit if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state and short-time state). ing. Specifically, there are provided a probabilistic jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and a normal jackpot determination table in which the number of jackpot determination values is set smaller than that in the probabilistic jackpot determination table. ing. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When in the gaming state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit (probability big hit or normal big hit). When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is set in the process of ending the jackpot game when it is determined to be a probable big hit or suddenly probable big hit, and is reset before the big hit game is started when it is decided to be a big hit. .

  If the random R value does not match any of the big hit determination values, it is checked whether the random R value matches any of the small hit determination values (step S62). If they match, a small hit flag is set (step S63). Then, the process proceeds to step S75. If it does not coincide with the small hit determination value, the process proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag. Then, the big hit type determination table is selected as a table used to determine the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). The type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2-1) stored in the random number buffer area (“normal”, “probability” or “surprise”) is determined as the jackpot type ( Step S73). Further, data indicating the determined type of jackpot is set in the jackpot symbol determination buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “normal”, “01” is set as data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is “probability”, “02” is set as data indicating the jackpot type. Is “03”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type. In this embodiment, even when a small hit is determined in step S62, the small hit flag is set in step S63, and “04” is set as data indicating the small hit in the big hit symbol determination buffer. Shall be.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are not set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “3”, and “7”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise”, “1”, which is the two round big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit type is determined as “normal” or “probability change”, “3” or “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91).

  When the jackpot flag is set, the table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types is used as a table according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. One of the use variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S101. The CPU 56 can determine the gaming state based on the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  When the small hit flag is set, the small hit variation pattern is used as a table used for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types according to the table selection rule shown in FIG. One of the type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected (steps S93 and S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the table selection rule shown in FIG. 24 (D) is based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state. Accordingly, one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected as a table used for determining whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbols is set to the reach state (step S95). Further, the random 2-2 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating the random 2-2 (step S96). Then, the CPU 56 is in the reach state corresponding to the value that matches the value of random 2-2 in the area corresponding to the reserved storage number (the value of the reserved storage number counter) in any of the selected reach determination tables 134A to 134C. Based on the data indicating presence / absence, whether or not to reach, the type of effect when not reaching or the type of reach when reaching is determined (step S97). Note that the value before decremented by -1 in the process of step S56 may be used as the reserved storage number used in the process of step S97.

  If it is decided to reach, the variation pattern type is determined according to the reach type (reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1 or reach HC2-1) determined in the process of step S97. One of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types (step S99). If it is decided not to reach, the types of effects determined in step S97 (non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1- 1 or non-reach HC1-2), one of non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. (Step S100). Then, the process proceeds to step S101.

  In step S <b> 101, the CPU 56 extracts the value of random 3 by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 3. Then, based on the extracted random 3 value, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the table selected in the process of step S92, S94, S99 or S100 (step S102). .

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137C as the tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. One of the determination tables 138A and 138B is selected (step S103). Further, the value of random 4 is extracted by extracting the count value of the counter for generating random 4 (step S104). Then, based on the extracted random 4 value, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103 (step S105).

  As a variation pattern, a variation pattern including super-rendition production other than non-reach PA1-5 (super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PB3-3, super PA4-3, super PA4-6, super PA5-3, If the super PB 4-3, the super PB 5-3, or the special PG 1-3) is determined (step S106A), the CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random 7 by extracting the count value of the counter for generating the random 7 Extract the value. Then, based on the extracted random 7 value, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table 140 shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. (Step S106B). That is, the number of re-variation execution times (including the first pseudo variation) in the pseudo-continuous performance is determined. In addition, by the processing in step S106B, the variation time for executing the pseudo continuous effect is also determined.

  Next, control is performed to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106).

  Also, the special symbol change is started (step S107). For example, a start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result specifying command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  Next, control signals transmitted and received between the main board 31 and the payout control board 37 will be described. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a payout command signal and the like transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370.

  The power supply confirmation signal is a signal that is at a high level (on state) when the main board 31 is rising, and is at a low level (off state) when power supply is detected. The prize ball REQ signal is a signal (that is, a trigger signal for a prize ball payout request) that becomes a low level (on state) when a prize ball payout request (when a prize ball number command is transmitted). Further, the prize ball REQ signal becomes a high level (off state) when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on after being turned on from the payout control microcomputer 370. The 4-bit award ball number signal is a signal (award ball number command) output for designating the number (1 to 15) of game balls for which a payout request is made.

  The prize ball BUSY signal is a signal that is set to a high level (on state) when the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms the on state of the prize ball REQ signal, and is turned off after a predetermined period. That is, it corresponds to an acceptance confirmation signal for the prize ball REQ signal. Therefore, the state in which the prize ball BUSY signal is OFF corresponds to a state of waiting for a prize ball number command reception. The payout error signal is a signal that becomes high level (ON state) when a prize ball payout error occurs. The ball-out signal is a signal that becomes high level (ON state) when the ball-out switch 187 is turned on. The full tank signal is a signal that becomes a high level (on state) when the full switch 48 is turned on. The award ball 10 count signal is a payout control signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560 and is accumulated using the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 to pay out the award ball. This is a signal transmitted based on the detection of 10 times.

  The prize ball REQ signal becomes low level (on state) when a prize ball payout request is made (when a prize ball number command is transmitted), and when a prize ball payout completion is received (when the prize ball BUSY signal is off). The signal is set to a high level (off state), and the prize ball BUSY signal is set to a high level (on state) when a prize ball payout request is received (when the prize ball REQ signal is on), and low when the prize is completed. It may be a signal to be turned off. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 turns on the prize ball REQ signal when the prize ball payout request is made, and the payout control microcomputer 370 turns on the prize ball BUSY signal when the prize ball REQ signal is turned on. When the required number of prize balls is paid out, the prize ball BUSY signal is turned off, and the game control microcomputer 560 turns off the prize ball BUSY signal. The prize ball REQ signal may be turned off.

  FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmission / reception of each control signal shown in FIG. FIG. 40 shows that signals indicating an abnormality relating to payout (payout error signal, ball-out signal, full tank signal) are also transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560. Yes. Also, a prize ball 10 count signal indicating the state of a detection signal of the number-of-payout count switch 301 at the time of paying out a prize ball from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560 (in this embodiment, the number of payouts) (Sent when the award ball payout is accumulated and detected ten times using the detection signal of the count switch 301). As shown in FIG. 40, the power confirmation signal, the prize ball REQ signal, and the prize ball number signal are output by the game control microcomputer 560 via the output circuit 67, and the payout control microcomputer 370 via the input circuit 373A. Is input. A signal from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560 is output by the payout control microcomputer 370 via the output circuit 373B, and input to the game control microcomputer 560 via the input circuit 68.

  FIG. 41 is a timing chart showing an example of how to output a payout command signal and the like. As shown in FIG. 41, the winning detection switch (the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, the count switch 23, the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a) has detected the winning of the game ball. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 560 turns on the prize ball REQ signal and turns the output state of the prize ball number signal into a state corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with winning. Specifically, when the gaming control microcomputer 560 detects that a game ball has won a winning area provided in the gaming machine using a detection signal of a winning detection switch, the gaming control microcomputer 560 calculates a predetermined number of winning balls. It is added to the contents of the total winning ball number storage buffer. When the content of the total winning ball number storage buffer becomes a non-zero value, the winning ball REQ signal is turned on, and the output state of the winning ball number signal is set in accordance with the number of winning balls to be paid out according to winning. Put it in a state.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a, 5 prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 15 game balls are paid out. Perform prize ball payout. When a game ball is detected by the winning hole switch 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a, seven prize balls are paid out. Further, as described above, the prize ball number signal is composed of 4 bits, and therefore, the lower 4 bits of the prize ball number signals of 00 (H) to 0F (H) expressed in 8 bits are The signal is transmitted from the main board 31 to the payout control board 37 by the award ball number signal. Hereinafter, it may be expressed as “00 (H) to 0F (H) prize ball number signal”, but in reality, the prize ball number signal is represented by 8 bits. This corresponds to the lower 4 bits of 0F (H).

  The payout control microcomputer 370 continues the on state of the award ball BUSY signal for a predetermined time (award ball BUSY signal on time) when the award ball REQ signal is turned on, and when the predetermined time elapses, the award ball BUSY signal. Is turned off. Then, in the payout control microcomputer 370, the ball payout device 97 is operated to execute the winning ball payout processing. Specifically, the payout motor 289 is rotated by the number designated by the prize ball number signal, and the number of prize balls designated by the prize ball number signal is paid out. The payout number count switch 301 detects the payout of the prize ball, and outputs a detection signal to the payout control microcomputer 370 each time the prize ball detects the payout. Further, the payout control microcomputer 370 outputs a prize ball 10 count signal to the game control microcomputer 560 every time the detection signals from the payout number count switch 301 are accumulated and input 10 times.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 confirms that the prize ball BUSY signal has changed to the OFF state, the game control microcomputer 560 turns the prize ball REQ signal to the OFF state after a predetermined time (a prize ball REQ signal OFF waiting time) has elapsed. At that time, the output state of the prize ball number signal is cleared and turned off. That is, a state in which the prize ball number signal indicates 0 (a state in which an invalid command is output) is set.

  FIG. 42 is a timing chart showing an example of how to output the prize ball 10 count signal. As shown in FIG. 42, the payout control CPU 371, when the payout number count switch 301 detects the payout of the game ball, checks whether or not the detection is the detection of the payout of the prize ball, and can detect the payout of the prize ball. For example, it is confirmed whether or not the award ball payout detection is accumulated and detected 10 times. Then, when the payout control CPU 371 accumulates and detects the payout of the prize ball 10 times, the prize ball 10 count signal is turned on for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). That is, every time the payout of 10 prize balls is confirmed, the prize ball 10 count signal is turned on for a predetermined period. Therefore, for example, the payout number count switch 301 detects the payout of 50 game balls, and if the detected game ball is a prize ball, ON / OFF of the prize ball 10 count signal is repeated five times.

  The CPU 56 decrements the value of the prize ball counter by 10 each time a prize ball 10 count signal is received in the above-described prize ball processing (step S31). The prize ball counter is a counter for managing the difference between the planned number of prize balls to be paid out and the number of prize balls actually paid out. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the CPU 56 detects a winning at any one of the winning holes and transmits a winning ball number signal, the CPU 56 sets a value designated by the winning ball number signal to be transmitted to the winning ball counter. to add. Also, the value of the prize ball counter is decremented by 10 based on the reception of the prize ball 10 count signal. Note that in this embodiment, when a winning opening has not yet occurred and no winning ball 10 count signal has been received, the value of the winning ball counter is a default value as shown in FIG. It is assumed that “100” is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the prize ball counter by 10 every time a prize ball 10 count signal is received, and when the value reaches a predetermined second threshold value (“50” in FIG. 42). It is determined that there is a possibility that an illegal act of irradiating infrared light to the light receiving element of the payout motor position sensor 295 (photo sensor) has been performed, and a prize ball error command indicating that a prize ball error has occurred is produced. Transmit to the control board 80. When receiving the prize ball error command, the effect control CPU 101 superimposes and displays on the effect display device 9 a prize ball error notification display for notifying the occurrence of a prize ball error. Thus, since the prize ball error notification display is performed based on the value of the prize ball counter reaching the predetermined second threshold value, the payout motor position sensor 295 (photo sensor) during the rotation operation of the payout motor. It can be recognized from the outside of the gaming machine that there is a possibility that an illegal act of paying out a lot of prize balls by irradiating the light receiving element with infrared rays has been performed.

  Next, the switch process (step S21) in the main process will be described. In this embodiment, when the ON state of the detection signal of each switch related to winning detection or gate passage continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the switch is certainly turned on. Specifically, the switch process is activated every 2 ms, but if the switch is detected to be turned on in both the switch process activated at the present time and the switch process activated 2 ms ago, the switch process is surely performed. Determined to be on.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing each 1-byte buffer formed in the RAM 55 used in the switching process. The last-time port buffer is a buffer in which the switch-on / off determination result of the last time (assuming 4 ms before) is stored. The previous port buffer is a buffer that stores the previous switch on / off determination result (assuming 2 ms before). As described above, in the switch-on buffer, when a switch on is detected, 1 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch, and when a switch off is detected, 0 is set in the corresponding bit of the switch. It is a buffer. The previous data is a buffer area that is temporarily used when the switch process is executed. The previous-time port buffer, the previous port buffer, the switch-on buffer, and the previous data are formed in the RAM 55. The bit arrangement of the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch-on buffer two times before the second corresponds to the bit arrangement of the input port 0. That is, information corresponding to each of the switch detection signals assigned to bits 0 to 7 of the input port 0 is set in bits 0 to 7 of the port buffer, the previous port buffer, and the switch-on buffer the previous time.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating a processing example of the switch process in step S21 in the game control process. In the switch process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) sets the content of the previous port buffer to the previous data (step S331). Further, the exclusive OR of the contents of the port buffer and the previous data is taken twice before (step S332). Then, the result of the exclusive OR operation is set as the previous data (step S333). At this stage, in the previous data, the bit having a different value among the 8 bits of the port buffer and the 8 bits of the previous port buffer is “1”. In addition, the contents of the previous port buffer are set in the port buffer two times before (step S334).

  Then, input port 0 data is input (step S335), and the input data is set in the previous port buffer (step S336). The processes in steps S334 and S336 correspond to a preparation process when the switch process is executed next time (after 2 ms).

  Next, the CPU 56 calculates the logical product of the data input from the input port 0 and the previous data (step S337). At this stage, in the previous data, a bit having a different value among the 8 bits of the previous port buffer and the 8 bits of the previous port buffer is “1”. That is, among the detection signals of the seven switches, the bit corresponding to the detection signal changed from the state before 2 ms from the state before 4 ms (from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”). Is “1”. Therefore, when the logical product of the previous data and the data input from the input port 0 is taken in step S337, the bit that is “1” in the data input from the input port 0 and 2 ms before The bit whose state has changed from the state 4 ms before becomes “1”. That is, as a result of the logical product operation, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the current state is the on state and has been detected to have changed from the off state to the on state during the previous switch processing (2 ms before) is “ 1 ”. In other words, the bit corresponding to the detection signal that has changed from the off state to the on state and then detected the on state twice in succession is “1”. Note that “continuously twice” means “both the switch process executed at a certain time and the switch process executed 2 ms after the switch process”.

  The CPU 56 stores the result of the logical product operation in the switch-on buffer (step S338). In the switch-on buffer, after changing from the off state to the on state, the bit corresponding to the detection signal in which the on state is detected twice consecutively is “1”. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 can confirm that the detection signal of the switch corresponding to the bit which is “1” in the switch-on buffer is surely turned on. Note that “definitely” means that the ON state has been detected twice consecutively, that is, it can be considered that the ON state has continued for 4 ms. It can be done.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the prize ball processing in step S31. In the prize ball process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a prize ball number addition process (step S341), a prize ball control process (step S342), and a prize ball counter subtraction process (step S343). Then, the contents of the port 0 buffer formed in the RAM 55 are output to the output port 0 (step S344). The contents of the port 0 buffer are updated in the prize ball control process.

  In the prize ball number adding process, a prize ball number table shown in FIG. 46 is used. The prize ball number table is set in the ROM 54. The number of processes (in this example, “7”) is set at the start address of the winning ball number table, and the switch input bit determination for each switch of the winning opening from which the winning ball is to be paid out by winning from the next address. The value and the number of winning balls are sequentially set corresponding to each switch of the winning opening. The switch input bit determination value is a value corresponding to the bit to which the detection signal of each switch at the input port 0 is input (see FIG. 12).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number adding process in step S341. In the winning ball number adding process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) sets the start address of the winning ball number table as a pointer (step S351). Then, the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of processes) is loaded (step S352). Next, the switch-on buffer is loaded into the register (step S353).

  Then, the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S354), and the logical product of the contents of the switch-on buffer and the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the switch input bit determination value) is calculated (step S355). . Further, the value of the pointer is increased by 1 (step S356).

  If the calculation result in step S355 is 0 (Y in step S361), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is not on, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (step S359), and if the number of processes is 0 The process ends, and if the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S354 (step S360).

  If the calculation result in step S355 is not 0 (N in step S361), that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is on, the CPU 56 stores data (in this case, the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer). (The number of prize balls) is set to the prize ball addition value (step S362), and the prize ball addition value is added to the content of the 16-bit total prize ball number storage buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S363). If a carry occurs as a result of the addition, the content of the total number of winning balls storage buffer is set to 65535 (= FFFF (H)) (steps S357 and S358). Then, the process proceeds to step S359.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the total number of winning balls using the total winning ball number storage buffer, but the method for managing the number of winning balls is shown in this embodiment. Not limited to those. For example, a buffer for 15 winning balls (specifically, a big winning port), a buffer for 7 winning balls (specifically, winning ports 29, 30, 33, 39), The number of winning prizes may be individually stored using a buffer for five winning balls (specifically, starting winning holes 13 and 14). In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 outputs, for example, a buffer for 15 winning balls, a buffer for 7 winning balls, a buffer for 5 winning balls, It may be confirmed whether or not there is a winning number in the order of the buffers, and a winning ball number signal may be output to the payout control microcomputer 370. Further, the buffer is further subdivided. For example, since there are four winning holes for seven prize balls, a buffer is prepared for each of the four winning holes 29, 30, 33, and 39, and the number of winning points to the winning hole is stored. You may do it. As described above, when using a buffer for 15 prize balls, a buffer for 7 prize balls, and a buffer for 5 prize balls, the number of prizes is assigned to each buffer. Instead of storing, the number of winning balls based on winning in each winning opening may be stored in each buffer.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the prize ball control process in step S342. In the prize ball control process, the game control microcomputer 560 executes any one of steps S371 to S374 according to the value of the prize ball process code.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the prize waiting process 1 (step S371) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is zero. The game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) confirms in the award ball waiting process 1 whether or not the award ball BUSY signal is turned on (step S3701). At this stage, since the prize ball BUSY signal should not be in the on state, when the prize ball BUSY signal is in the on state, the prize ball abnormal state output value (20 (H)) is stored in the port 0 buffer. To complete the processing (step S3702). When the prize ball abnormal state output value is set in the port 0 buffer, the contents of the port 0 buffer are outputted to the output port 0 in step S344 (see FIG. 45), whereby the prize ball REQ signal and the power supply confirmation signal are output. All the prize ball number signals are turned off (see FIG. 10).

  In this embodiment, bidirectional communication is performed between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370, and the payout control microcomputer 370 performs a BUSY signal when a prize ball is being paid out. However, the one-way communication from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370 may be performed and the BUSY signal may not be output. In this case, it is not necessary to perform steps S3701 and S3702 in the prize ball waiting process 1.

  If the prize ball BUSY signal is off, the prize ball waiting output value (30 (H)) is set in the port 0 buffer (step S3703). When the prize ball waiting output value is set in the port 0 buffer, the contents of the port 0 buffer are outputted to the output port 0 in step S344, so that the prize ball REQ signal is turned off and the power confirmation signal is output. Is kept on (see FIG. 10). In addition, the award ball number signal enters an invalid command (00 (H)). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the prize ball timer is 0 (step S3704). If the prize ball timer is not 0, the value of the prize ball timer is decreased by 1 (step S3705), and the process is terminated. The prize ball timer is a timer for measuring the time required for the prize ball processing. At this stage, the value of the prize ball timer is not 0, which means that the next prize ball after the previous payout process is completed. Waiting time until the REQ signal is turned on (time for setting intervals between the plurality of prize ball REQ signals when the prize ball payout is continuously executed during the on period, 00 (H ) During which the award ball number signal is output). The prize ball timer is set in step S3735 of the prize ball waiting process 3 described later. In addition, after the execution of the award ball waiting process 3 in step S374 is completed and the previous payout process is completed, the processes of steps S3703 to S3705 are turned off and the award ball number signal is invalidated. This is a process for outputting the command (00 (H)).

  If the value of the prize ball timer is 0, then the CPU 56 checks the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer (step S3706). If the value is 0, the process ends. If not, the prize ball process code value is set to 1 (step S3707), and the process ends.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a prize ball transmission process (step S372) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 1. The game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether or not the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the prize ball command maximum value (“15” in this example) in the prize ball transmission process. Confirmation is made (step S3711). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is equal to or greater than the prize ball command maximum value, the prize ball command maximum value is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S3712). If the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer are smaller than the maximum prize ball command value, the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer are set in the prize ball number buffer (step S3713).

  Instead of using the total winning ball number storage buffer, each of the 15 winning ball winning buffer, the seven winning ball winning buffer, and the five winning ball winning buffer is used for each. When configured to store the number of winning prizes, the CPU 56 performs processing in step S3711, for example, a buffer for 15 winning balls, a buffer for 7 winning balls, a winning ball It is confirmed whether or not there is a winning number in the order of the buffer for the five winning mouths, and the number of winning balls is specified based on the winning number. Then, the specified number of prize balls (number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prizes stored in the buffer) is set, and a prize ball number signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370. Also, it is confirmed whether or not the number of prize balls based on the number of winning prizes is smaller than the prize ball command maximum value “15”. If the number of prize balls is equal to or greater than the prize ball command maximum value, the process proceeds to step S3712, and the prize ball command maximum value is set in the prize ball number buffer. If the number of prize balls is smaller than the maximum value of the prize ball command, the process proceeds to step S3713, and the number of prize balls is set in the prize ball number buffer. It should be noted that the CPU 56 first determines the number of prize balls for specifying 15 prize balls, for example, if there is at least one prize ball in the prize opening buffer regardless of whether or not the number of prizes is plural. A signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370. After that, if there is still a winning number in the buffer for 15 winning balls, a winning ball number signal for designating 15 winning balls is sent out. The process of transmitting to may be repeatedly executed. If there are no more prizes in the buffer for 15 prize balls, then if there is at least one prize in the buffer for 7 prize balls, first, a prize ball for designating 7 prize balls is designated. When the number signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 370, and there is still a winning number in the buffer for the seven winning balls, the winning ball number signal designating the seven winning balls is further issued. The process of transmitting to 370 may be repeatedly executed.

  Thereafter, the output value (10 (H)) in the prize ball REQ is set in the port 0 buffer (step S3714). When the output value in the prize ball REQ is set in the port 0 buffer, the contents of the port 0 buffer are output to the output port 0 in step S344, so that the prize ball REQ signal is turned on, and the power confirmation signal Is kept on (see FIG. 10). Further, the contents of the winning ball number buffer are set in the lower 4 bits of the port 0 buffer (step S3715). When the contents of the winning ball number buffer are set in the port 0 buffer, the winning ball number signal is output to the payout control microcomputer 370 by outputting the contents of the port 0 buffer to the output port 0 in step S344. Is done.

  Next, the CPU 56 adds the contents of the prize ball number buffer to the prize ball counter (step S3716). As described above, the value of the prize ball counter is assumed to be set to “100” by default. Therefore, for example, when winning is made to the winning holes 29, 30, 33, and 39 for the first time after turning on the power to the gaming machine, “7” is added to the winning ball counter and the count value becomes “107”. "

  In this embodiment, the content of the prize ball number buffer is added to the prize ball counter when the prize ball number signal is output. However, the content of the prize ball number buffer is subtracted from the prize ball counter. You may do it. For example, in the above-described example, when winning is made to the winning holes 29, 30, 33, and 39 for the first time after turning on the power to the gaming machine, “7” is subtracted from the winning ball counter to count value May be “93”.

  In addition, the prize ball counter addition process shown in step S3716 may be performed immediately before the prize ball number signal is output or may be performed immediately after the prize ball number signal is output. May be.

  Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the prize ball counter after the addition exceeds a predetermined first threshold value (step S3716A). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the prize ball counter is 150 or more.

  If the value of the prize ball counter exceeds the predetermined first threshold value in step S3716A (that is, 150 or more), the CPU 56 determines that a prize ball shortage error has occurred, and has already won a prize ball shortage error. It is confirmed whether or not a prize ball shortage error notification flag indicating that notification is started is set (step S3716B). If not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a prize ball shortage error command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S3716C) and sets a prize ball shortage error notification flag (step S3716D). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 superimposes and displays a prize ball shortage error notification display on the effect display device 9 based on the reception of the prize ball shortage error command, as will be described later. The prize ball shortage error notification flag may be reset when the value of the prize ball counter returns to within a predetermined first threshold (that is, when the prize ball counter value returns to a value less than 150). Further, the prize ball shortage error notification flag may be reset and the prize ball shortage error notification display may be stopped by a reset operation using a reset button or the like. Further, after the start of the shortage error notification display, the shortage error notification flag is reset and the shortage error notification display is stopped based on the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes). May be. If the value of the prize ball counter exceeds a predetermined first threshold without using the prize ball shortage error notification flag, a prize ball shortage error command may be transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 each time. Good. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 may stop displaying the prize shortage error notification based on the fact that the prize shortage error command is no longer received.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case where a prize ball shortage error notification display is superimposed and displayed on the effect display device 9 as a prize ball shortage error notification is shown. It is not restricted to the aspect shown by. For example, if the effect control microcomputer 100 is provided with a prize ball shortage error notification lamp, the effect control microcomputer 100 turns on the prize ball shortage error notification lamp based on the reception of a prize ball shortage error command. It may be displayed in a blinking manner, or a predetermined warning sound may be output from a speaker.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the control of the winning ball shortage error notification is performed on the side of the production control microcomputer 100 has been shown, but even if the control of the shortage ball error notification is performed on the gaming control microcomputer 560 side. Good. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 may perform control to turn on or blink the prize ball shortage error notification lamp when the occurrence of a prize ball shortage error is detected in the process of step S3716A.

  Thereafter, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 2 (step S3717), and the process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the maximum value of the prize ball command is “15”. Therefore, a prize ball number signal designating the maximum number of payouts of “15” is transmitted to the payout control board 37.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the winning ball waiting process 2 (step S373) executed when the value of the winning ball process code is 2. In the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56), a prize ball output (turned on) by the payout control means in response to the prize ball REQ being turned on in the prize ball waiting process 2. It is checked whether or not the BUSY signal is turned on (step S3721). When the on-state is not turned on, a BUSY start determination time value (for example, 2) is set in the prize ball timer (step S3722). The BUSY start determination time value is for the game control microcomputer 560 to confirm that the prize ball BUSY signal has been output (turned on) if the prize ball BUSY signal remains on for the time indicated by the value. Is the value of

  Accordingly, the CPU 56 checks the value of the prize ball timer when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on (step S3723), and if the value is not 0, the value of the prize ball timer is decreased by 1 (step S3724), and processing is performed. Exit.

  In this embodiment, bidirectional communication is performed between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370, and the payout control microcomputer 370 performs a BUSY signal when a prize ball is being paid out. However, the one-way communication from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370 may be performed and the BUSY signal may not be output. In this case, it is not necessary to perform steps S3721 and S3722 in the prize ball waiting process 2.

  When the value of the prize ball timer becomes 0, it is determined that the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on, and the contents of the prize ball number buffer are changed from the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer (the number of prize balls paid out to the payout control means). Is subtracted (step S3725). Then, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 3 (step S3726), and the process ends.

  In the case where the one-way communication is performed from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370 and the BUSY signal is not output, the contents of the generic ball number storage buffer in step S3725. The process of subtracting the contents of the winning ball number buffer from the above may be executed immediately before or after the outputting of the winning ball number signal.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the award ball waiting process 3 (step S374) executed when the value of the award ball process code is 3. The game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) confirms whether or not the prize ball BUSY signal is turned off in the prize ball waiting process 3 (step S3731). When not in the off state, a BUSY end determination time value (for example, 3) is set in the prize ball timer (step S3732). The BUSY end determination time value is a value for creating a prize ball REQ signal OFF waiting period.

  Accordingly, the CPU 56 checks the value of the prize ball timer when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned off (step S3733). If the value is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the prize ball timer by 1 (step S3734). Exit.

  In this embodiment, bidirectional communication is performed between the game control microcomputer 560 and the payout control microcomputer 370, and the payout control microcomputer 370 performs a BUSY signal when a prize ball is being paid out. However, the one-way communication from the game control microcomputer 560 to the payout control microcomputer 370 may be performed and the BUSY signal may not be output. In this case, it is not necessary to perform steps S3731 and S3732 in the award ball waiting process 3.

  When the value of the prize ball timer becomes 0, that is, when the prize ball REQ signal off waiting period ends, the prize ball REQ waiting time is set in the prize ball timer (step S3735). Then, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 0 (step S3736), and the process is terminated. As described above, the award ball REQ waiting time is the waiting time until the next award ball REQ signal is turned on (when award ball payout is continuously performed, the on periods of a plurality of award ball REQ signals are Is a time for providing an interval).

  Through the above processing, the game control microcomputer 560 stores the total number of game balls as prize balls to be paid out based on the establishment of the payout condition in the total prize ball number storage buffer so as to be specified. The total award ball number storage buffer corresponds to a prize game medium number backup storage means for storing the stored contents for at least a predetermined period by a backup power source as a fluctuation data storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Further, the game control means transmits a payout command signal for designating a payout number of a predetermined number of prize balls to the payout control means based on the number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer. Here, the predetermined number is 15 if the number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer is 15 or more, and is stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer if it is less than 15. The number of prize balls. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a subtraction process is performed for subtracting the number of payouts specified by the payout command signal from the number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the prize ball counter subtraction process in step S343. In the winning ball counter subtraction process, whether or not the gaming ball microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) has already set the winning ball 10 count detection flag indicating that the input of the winning ball 10 count signal has been detected. Is confirmed (step S3741). If it is set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a prize ball 10 count signal is input from the payout control microcomputer 370 (step S3742). Specifically, the logical product of the contents of the switch-on buffer and the winning ball 10 count signal input bit determination value is calculated, and if the calculation result is not 0, it is determined that the winning ball 10 count signal is in the ON state. The CPU 56 determines whether or not the prize ball 10 count signal is on by checking whether the bit 0 of the input port 1 is in the on state, not the contents of the switch-on buffer. It may be. If it has been input, the process ends. If not input, the CPU 56 resets the winning ball 10 count detection flag (step S3743).

  In this embodiment, the processing of steps S3741 to S3743 is executed to detect the input of the prize ball 10 count signal, and then the next prize ball after the input of the prize ball 10 count signal is turned off once. On the condition that the input of the 10 count signal is detected, control proceeds to the processing after step S3744 to perform subtraction of the prize ball counter. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the value of the prize ball counter is mistakenly subtracted twice by inputting the prize ball 10 count signal once.

  If the prize ball 10 count detection flag is not set in step S3741 or if the prize ball 10 count detection flag is reset in step S3743, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the prize ball 10 count signal is input from the payout control microcomputer 370. (Step S3744). Specifically, the logical product of the contents of the switch-on buffer and the winning ball 10 count signal input bit determination value is calculated, and if the calculation result is not 0, it is determined that the winning ball 10 count signal is in the ON state.

  If the winning ball 10 count signal is input, the CPU 56 sets a winning ball 10 count detection flag (step S3745), and subtracts a predetermined subtraction value (“10” in this example) from the winning ball counter (step S3745). S3746). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the prize ball counter after the subtraction exceeds a predetermined second threshold (step S3747). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the prize ball counter is 50 or less.

  If the value of the prize ball counter exceeds the predetermined second threshold value (ie, 50 or less) in step S3747, the CPU 56 determines that a prize ball error has occurred, and has already issued a prize ball error notification. It is confirmed whether or not a prize ball error notification flag indicating that it has started is set (step S3748). If not set, the CPU 56 controls to send a prize ball error command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S3749) and sets a prize ball error notification flag (step S3750). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 superimposes and displays a prize ball error notification display on the effect display device 9 based on the reception of the prize ball error command, as will be described later. The prize ball error notification flag may be reset when the value of the prize ball counter returns to within a predetermined second threshold (that is, when the prize ball error value returns to a value greater than 50). Further, the prize ball error notification flag may be reset and the prize ball error notification display may be stopped by a reset operation using a reset button or the like. In addition, after the start of the prize ball error notification display, the prize ball error notification flag may be reset and the prize ball error notification display may be stopped based on the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes). . Further, without using the prize ball error notification flag, if the prize ball counter value exceeds a predetermined second threshold value, a prize ball error command may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 each time. Then, the production control microcomputer 100 may stop the prize ball error notification display based on the fact that no prize ball error command is received.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case where a prize ball error notification display is superimposed and displayed on the effect display device 9 as a prize ball error notification is shown, but the notification mode of the prize ball error notification is shown in this embodiment. It is not restricted to an aspect. For example, if a prize ball error notification lamp is provided, the production control microcomputer 100 turns on or blinks the prize ball error notification lamp based on the reception of a prize ball error command. Alternatively, a predetermined warning sound may be output from a speaker.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the prize control error notification control is performed on the effect control microcomputer 100 side, but the control of the prize ball error notification may be performed on the game control microcomputer 560 side. In this case, for example, when the occurrence of a prize ball error is detected in the process of step S3747, the game control microcomputer 560 may perform control to turn on or blink the prize ball error notification lamp.

  When the prize ball number buffer is output in step S3716 of the prize ball transmission process and the content of the prize ball number buffer is configured to be subtracted from the prize ball counter, in step S3746, the CPU 56 displays the prize ball counter. A predetermined value “10” may be added to. In this case, for example, when the default value of the prize ball counter is “100”, the CPU 56 may determine whether or not the value of the prize ball counter is “150” or more in step S3747. If it is “150” or more, it is determined that a prize ball error has occurred, and a prize ball error command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on condition that the prize ball error notification flag is not set. Control may be performed.

  In this embodiment, the prize ball counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 53 is executed during the prize ball process (step S31). However, the prize ball counter subtraction process is executed at another timing. Also good. For example, when the input data of the input port 1 (see FIG. 12) changes during the timer interrupt process, the input port data confirmation process of transmitting the input data of the input port 1 to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. If configured to execute, the prize ball counter subtraction process may be executed during the input port data confirmation process.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the input port data confirmation processing in step S23 (see FIG. 15). In the input port data confirmation processing, the CPU 56 reads the data (input data) of the input port 1 (see FIG. 12) from the input port 1 (step S1581), and the input data of the input port 1 and the input formed in the RAM. An exclusive OR is performed for each bit with the contents of the port 1 buffer (step S1582). If there is a bit with different logic (meaning “1” or “0”) between the input data of the input port 1 and the contents of the input port 1 buffer formed in the RAM, an 8-bit exclusive The operation result of the logical sum does not become 00 (H).

  Then, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the exclusive OR operation result is 00 (H) (step S1583). If the calculation result is 00 (H), the process ends. If the calculation result is not 00 (H), the input data of the input port 1 is set to the second byte of the command buffer (step S1584). Also, FF (H) is set to the first byte of the command buffer (step S1585). Then, CPU 56 transmits an input port data designation command to effect control microcomputer 100 based on the setting content of step S1583 (step S1586).

  Then, the CPU 56 stores the input data of the input port 1 input in step S1581 in the input port 1 buffer (step S1587).

  The input data of the input port 1 is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on condition that the input data of the input port 1 has been changed by the control as described above. At that time, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the input data of the input port 1 as it is as an effect control command. Therefore, even if there is a lot of information indicated by the signal input to the input port 1, the control burden on the game control means is light. However, the CPU 56 may once capture the data of the input port 1 and store the captured data in the input port 1 buffer each time.

  Further, since the presentation control command related to the input data of the input port 1 is output from the main board 31 on condition that the input data of the input port 1 has changed, for example, it is always 1 in a predetermined control period (period of 2 ms interval). The transmission cycle of the effect control command is difficult to grasp compared to the case where the effect control command is configured to be transmitted. That is, it becomes difficult to grasp the cycle of the predetermined control period. In the predetermined control period, the counter value for generating a random number related to the jackpot is updated one by one. Therefore, when the period of the predetermined control period is easily grasped, the timing at which the counter value becomes the predetermined value is easily grasped. Become. Predetermined timing means that the value of the big hit determination random number when the big hit determination random number is created by software, or when it is configured to determine whether to make a probable big hit based on the big hit symbol determination random number For example, the timing coincides with the determination value, the timing when the value of the jackpot symbol determination random number matches the value corresponding to the probability variation symbol, and the like. The fact that the timing at which the value of the counter reaches the predetermined value is easily grasped means that it is easy to receive fraud. In this embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to receive fraud.

  When receiving the input port data designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 specifies the payout state and the door open state based on the received input port data designation command. Then, the payout state and the door open state are notified based on the specified result. For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the payout error specification bit (D4) in the input port data specification command is on, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that it is in the payout error state and displays “payout” on the effect display device 9. A character string such as "Error" is displayed. Further, for example, when the microcomputer 100 for effect control determines that the ball break error designation bit (D3) in the input port data designation command is in the on state, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that it is a ball break error state and produces the effect display device. 9 displays a character string such as “ball break error”. Further, for example, when the microcomputer 100 for effect control determines that the full tank error specification bit (D2) in the input port data specification command is in the ON state, the microcomputer 100 determines that it is in the full tank error state and causes the effect display device 9 to Displays a character string such as "full tank error". Further, for example, if the microcomputer 100 for effect control determines that the door opening error specifying bit (D1) in the input port data specifying command is in the ON state, it determines that it is in the door opening error state, and the effect display device. 9 displays a character string such as “door open error”. Further, for example, when the microcomputer 100 for effect control determines that the prize ball 10 count designation bit (D0) in the input port data designation command is on, it determines that 10 prize balls are complete, A character string such as “completion of 10 prize balls” is displayed on the effect display device 9. The production control microcomputer 100 may notify the payout state or the door open state specified based on the input port data designation command by lighting or blinking the lamp, and a predetermined warning sound from the speaker 27. You may alert | report by outputting etc. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the payout state and door open state specified based on the input port data designation command on the effect display device 9, lamp lighting / flashing display, or sound output from the speaker 27. You may make it alert | report by any one or some combination of these.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 transmits the input data of the input port 1 as it is as the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the CPU 56 does not change the part of the input data of the input port 1 as it is. You may make it transmit, process a part, and transmit. For example, the processing may be performed after logical inversion. The logic inversion may be realized by a hardware inversion circuit. Further, as processing, for example, the bit position in one byte may be changed. The change (including shift) of the bit position may be realized by hardware wiring.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 executes the input port data confirmation process shown in FIG. 54 by the timer interrupt process, but executes it in the main process (between steps S16 and S19 shown in FIG. 14). It may be.

  55 to 62 are flowcharts showing the information output processing in step S30. Of the processes shown in FIGS. 55 to 62, steps S1002 to S1030 are processes for outputting the start port 1 signal, and steps S1031 to S1036 are processes for outputting the symbol determination number 1 signal. Steps S1037 to S1042 are processes for outputting two signals of symbol determination times, and steps S1050 to S1068 are processes for outputting one signal of big hit, two signals of big hit, short time signal, four signals of big hit and three signals of big hit. is there. Steps S1076 to S1101 are processes for outputting a prize ball information signal, and steps S1102 to S1124 are processes for outputting a door opening signal.

  In the information output process, the CPU 56 sets an initial value (00 (H)) in the information buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S1001). Then, the address of the start port 1 information setting table is set in the pointer (step S1002), and the number of processes pointed to by the pointer is loaded (step S1003). The starting port 1 information setting table includes the number of processes (= 2), the starting port 1 switch input bit (first starting port switch input bit determination value (40 (H)), and the starting port 2 switch input bit (second starting port). The switch input bit determination value (80 (H)) is set In step S1003, since the pointer points to the address of the number of processes in the start port 1 information setting table, the number of processes in the start port 1 information setting table (= 2) data will be loaded.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the contents of the switch-on buffer into the register (step S1004), and sets the switch-on buffer as switch input data (step S1005). Then, the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S1006), the start port switch input bit pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the start port 1 switch input bit) is loaded into the register (step S1007), the start port 1 switch input bit and the switch input The logical product of the data is taken (step S1008). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 40 (H), that is, when the first start port switch 13a is on, the logical product operation result is 40 (H). When the first start port switch 13a is not on, the logical product operation result is 00 (H).

  If the logical operation result is 0 (Y in step S1009), the process proceeds to step S1015. If the result of the logical product is not 0 (N in step S1009), it is determined that the first start winning opening 13 has been won, and the start opening 1 information storage counter is loaded into the register (step S1010). The start port 1 information storage counter is a counter that counts the number of remaining outputs of the start port 1 signal (that is, the number of remaining first winning prizes of the first start winning portion where the start port 1 signal is not output). Next, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the start port 1 information storage counter (step S1011). Then, it is confirmed whether the calculation result (added result) is not 0 (step S1012). When the calculation result is 0 (N in step S1012), 1 is subtracted from the calculation result (step S1013). Then, the calculation result is stored in the start port 1 information storage counter (step S1014).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the number of processes (step S1015), and determines whether the number of processes is not 0 (step S1015). When the number of processes is not 0 (Y in step S1016), the process proceeds to step S1004. Then, the contents of the switch-on buffer are loaded into the register (step S1004), and the switch-on buffer is set to switch input data (step S1005). Then, the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S1006), the start port switch input bit pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the start port 2 switch input bit) is loaded into the register (step S1007), the start port 2 switch input bit and the switch input The logical product of the data is taken (step S1008). When the content of the switch-on buffer is 80 (H), that is, when the second start port switch 14a is on, the logical product operation result is 80 (H). When the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, the logical product operation result is 00 (H). Thereafter, the processes of steps S1009 to S1016 described above are executed.

  If it is determined in step S1016 that the number of processes is 0 (N in step S1016), the CPU 56 loads the start port 1 information storage timer (step S1017), and sets the state of the start port 1 information storage timer in the flag register. It is reflected (step S1018), and it is determined whether or not the start port 1 signal is being output (step S1019). The start port 1 information storage timer is a timer for measuring an on time and an off time (on time 200 ms and off time 200 ms described later) of the start port 1 signal. If the value of the start port 1 information storage timer is not 0, it is determined that the start port 1 signal is being output. If the value of the start port 1 information storage timer is 0, it is determined that the start port 1 signal is not being output. The

  If the start port 1 signal is being output (Y in step S1019), the process proceeds to step S1026. If the start port 1 signal is not being output (N in step S1019), the CPU 56 loads the start port 1 information storage counter (step S1020), and reflects the state of the start port 1 information storage counter in the flag register ( In step S1021, it is determined whether there is a remaining number of output times of the start port 1 signal (step S1022). When the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is turned on (N in step S1009), the start port 1 information storage counter is incremented by 1, so the remaining number of output times of the start port 1 signal It will be determined that there is.

  If there is no remaining number of outputs of the start port 1 signal (Y in step S1022), the process proceeds to step S1031. If there is a remaining number of times of output of the start port 1 signal (N in step S1023), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the start port 1 information storage counter (step S1023), and the calculation result (the result of subtracting 1) is the start port 1 Store in the information storage counter (step S1024). Then, the winning information operating time (200) is set in the register (step S1025). The winning information operating time (200) is a time for which a 2 ms timer interruption is executed 200 times, that is, a time of 0.400 seconds (400 ms).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the start port 1 information storage timer if the winning information operating time is not set in step S1025, and subtracts 1 from the winning information operating time if the winning information operating time is set in step S1025. (Step S1026). Then, the calculation result (result obtained by subtracting 1) is stored in the start port 1 information storage timer (step S1027).

  The CPU 56 compares the calculation result with the winning information on time (100) (step S1029), and determines whether the calculation result is shorter than the winning information on time (step S1030). The winning information ON time (100) is a time for which a 2 ms timer interruption is executed 100 times, that is, a time of 0.200 seconds (200 ms).

  If the calculation result is not shorter than the winning information on time, that is, if the calculation result (remaining time of the start port 1 information storage timer) is longer than the winning information on time (200 ms) (N in step S1029) The CPU 56 sets the start port 1 output bit position of the information buffer (bit 0 of the output port 3 in the example shown in FIG. 11) (step S1030). When the start bit 1 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1125, and the output value is output to the output port 3 in step S1126, whereby the start port 1 signal is output. It will be output from port 3.

  When the winning of the first starting winning port 13 or the second starting winning port 14 (ON of the first starting port switch 13a or the second starting port switch 14a) is generated by the processing of steps S1001 to S1030 described above, the engine is started. Mouth 1 signal is output. That is, after the start port 1 signal is turned on for 200 ms, it is turned off for 200 ms. By inputting this start port 1 signal to the hall computer, it is possible to recognize the number of winnings to the first start winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14.

  Since the start port 1 signal is turned on for 200 ms and then turned off for 200 ms, the next start is performed after the off state for 200 ms even if a start winning is continuously generated in a short time. Mouth 1 signal is output. That is, the start port 1 signal is output at an interval of at least 200 ms.

  Thus, since the start port 1 signals are output at intervals of at least 200 ms, the hall computer can reliably grasp the total number of start winnings.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the symbol determination number 1 information timer into the register (step S1031), reflects the state of the symbol determination number 1 information timer in the flag register (step S1032), and the symbol determination number 1 information timer times out. It is determined whether or not (step S1033). In this embodiment, in the special symbol variation processing (step S303), when the variation time is timed out, when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped and when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped, the symbol determination count 1 When the symbol fixed number output time (0.500 seconds in this example) is set in the information timer and the symbol fixed number output time has not elapsed, it is determined that the symbol fixed number 1 information timer has not timed out, When the symbol determination count output time has elapsed (when the value of the symbol determination count 1 information timer is 0), it is determined that the symbol determination count 1 information timer has timed out.

  If the symbol determination count 1 information timer has not timed out (N in step S1033), the symbol determination count 1 information timer is decremented by 1 (step S1034), and the calculation result is stored in the symbol determination count 1 information timer (step S1035). . Then, the design buffer count 1 output bit position of the information buffer (bit 1 of output port 3 in the example shown in FIG. 11) is set (step S1036). When the symbol determination number 1 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1125, and the output value is output to the output port 3 in step S1126. Is output from the output port 3 (becomes ON state). If the symbol determination number 1 information timer times out (Y in step S1033), the process of step S1036 is not executed, and as a result, the symbol determination number 1 signal is turned off.

  By the above-described processing of steps S1031 to S1036, every time the variation of the first special symbol stops (stop symbol is fixed) and every time the variation of the second special symbol stops, the symbol determination number 1 signal is the number of symbol determination times. The output time (for example, 500 ms) is turned on.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the symbol determination number 2 information timer into the register (step S1037), reflects the state of the symbol determination number 2 information timer in the flag register (step S1038), and the symbol determination number 2 information timer times out. It is determined whether or not (step S1039). In this embodiment, in the special symbol variation processing (step S303), when the variation time is timed out, only when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped, the symbol determination number 2 information timer displays the symbol determination number output time (main In the example, 0.500 seconds) is set (see steps S125 and S126), and when the symbol fixed number output time has not elapsed, it is determined that the special symbol stop information timer has not timed out, and the symbol fixed number output is output. When the time has elapsed (when the value of the symbol determination number 2 information timer is 0), it is determined that the symbol determination number 2 information timer has timed out.

  If the symbol determination count 2 information timer has not timed out (N in step S1039), the symbol determination count 2 information timer is decremented by 1 (step S1040), and the calculation result is stored in the symbol determination count 2 information timer (step S1041). . Then, the symbol fixed number 2 output bit position of the information buffer (bit 2 of the output port 3 in the example shown in FIG. 11) is set (step S1042). When the symbol determination number 2 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1125, and the output value is output to the output port 3 in step S1126. Is output from the output port 3 (becomes ON state). If the symbol determination number 2 information timer times out (Y in step S1039), the process of step S1042 is not executed, so that the symbol determination number 2 signal is turned off.

  By the process of steps S1037 to S1042 described above, every time the variation of the first special symbol is stopped (stopped symbol is fixed), the symbol determination frequency 2 signal is turned on in the symbol determination frequency output time (for example, 500 ms).

  Further, by the processing of steps S1031 to S1042 described above, the symbol determination number 1 signal is output for 0.500 seconds when the first special symbol variation is stopped and when the second special symbol variation is stopped. Further, only when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped, the symbol determination number 2 signal is output for 0.500 seconds.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the special symbol process flag (step S1050), compares the value of the special symbol process flag with the special winning opening opening pre-processing designation value (“5”) (step S1051), and the special symbol process flag. It is determined whether the value of is less than 5 (step S1052). When the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (Y in step S1052), the process proceeds to step S1055. When the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (N in step S1052), the output bit position of the big hit of the information buffer is set (step S1053). Further, the big output 2 output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1054). When the big hit 1 output bit position and the big hit 2 output bit position of the information buffer are set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1125, and the output value is output to the output port 3 in the step S1126. One signal and two jackpot signals are output from the output port 3 (become turned on).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a special symbol high probability check process for confirming whether or not it is in a high probability state (step S1055), and determines whether or not it is in a high probability state (step S1056). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines whether or not it is in a high probability state by confirming whether or not the probability variation flag is set. When the state is a high probability state (Y in step S1056), the output buffer big hit 4 output bit position is set (step S1057). When the big output 4 output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1125, and the output value is output to the output port 3 in step S1126. Is output (becomes ON state).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a time reduction check process for confirming whether or not it is in the time reduction state (step S1058), and determines whether or not it is in the time reduction state (step S1059). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines whether or not it is in the time reduction state by confirming whether or not the time reduction flag is set. If the time-short state is set (Y in step S1059), the time-short output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1060). When the time-short output bit position is set, a time-short signal is output from the output port 2 by setting the information buffer to the output value in the subsequent step S1102 and outputting the output value to the output port 2 in step S1103. (Turns on) Also, the big output 2 output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1061). When the jackpot 2 output bit position is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1125, and the output value is output to the output port 3 in step S1126, whereby the jackpot 2 signal is output from the output port 3. (Turns on).

  Further, the CPU 56 loads the special symbol process flag (step S1062), compares the value of the special symbol process flag with the special winning opening opening pre-processing designation value (“5”) (step S1063), and sets the special symbol process flag. It is determined whether or not the value is less than 5 (step S1064). When the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (Y in step S1064), the process proceeds to step S1069. When the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (N in step S1064), the contents of the jackpot symbol determination buffer are loaded (step S1065), and the contents of the jackpot symbol determination buffer are compared with the high probability symbol designation value 3. (Step S1066). Here, the jackpot symbol determination buffer stores the contents of the jackpot type determined in step S73 in FIG. 37 and the contents indicating that the jackpot determination is determined in the jackpot determination in steps S61 and S62. “01” is a normal big hit, “02” is a probability big hit, “03” is a sudden big odd hit, and “04” is a big hit. Then, the contents of the jackpot symbol determination buffer and the high probability symbol designation value 3 are compared. If the contents of the jackpot symbol judgment buffer are not higher than the high probability symbol designation value 3 (N in step S1067), the number of rounds at the jackpot Is determined to be 15 rounds. In this case, the big output 3 output bit position of the information buffer is set (step S1068). When the jackpot 3 output bit position is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in the subsequent step S1125, and the output value is output to the output port 3 in step S1126, whereby the jackpot 3 signal is output from the output port 3. (Turns on).

  By the processing of steps S1050 to S1068 described above, one big hit signal, two big hit signals, a short time signal, four big hit signals and three big hit signals are output (turned on) according to the type of big hit and gaming state. .

  The hall computer inputs one signal of big hit and three signals of big hit, and can recognize which of the big hits of 15 rounds and the big hits of 2 rounds (sudden probability change big hit or small hit) by these signals. Specifically, when one jackpot signal is on and all three jackpot signals are on (when any jackpot signal is on), it can be determined that 15 rounds of jackpot have occurred, When the big hit 1 signal is on and the big hit 3 signal is off, it can be determined that two rounds of big hit (suddenly probable big hit) or small hits have occurred. Note that a big hit signal different from the one big hit signal and the three big hit signals may be output to the hall computer so that it can be distinguished whether a sudden change probability big hit or a small hit has occurred.

  In addition, the hall computer receives four jackpot signals and a short time signal, and can grasp the gaming state based on these signals. Specifically, when the big hit 4 signal is in the on state and the short time signal is in the off state, it can be determined that the gaming state is a probabilistic state, the big hit 4 signal is in the on state, and the short time signal is also When it is in the on state, it can be determined that the gaming state is a short time state with a probable change, and when the jackpot 4 signal is in the off state and the short time signal is in the on state, it is determined that the gaming state is in the short state. When the big hit 4 signal is in the off state and the time reduction signal is also in the off state, it can be determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads bit data of the winning ball 10 count signal of the input port 1 (step S1076). Then, a prize ball 10 count signal timer is loaded (step S1077). The prize ball 10 count signal timer is a timer for determining the time in which the prize ball 10 count signal is on.

  Then, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the bit data of the prize ball 10 count signal is “1” (step S1078), and if it is “1”, the prize ball 10 count signal timer is incremented by 1 (step S1079). If it is not “1” (“0”), the prize ball 10 count signal timer is cleared to 0 (step S1080). Next, the CPU 56 compares the prize ball 10 count signal timer with the switch-on determination value (2) (step S1081), and determines whether or not the value of the prize ball 10 count signal timer matches the switch-on determination value (2). (Step S1082). If the value of the prize ball 10 count signal timer does not coincide with the switch-on determination value (2) (Y in step S1082), the process proceeds to step S1088. If they match (N in step S1082), it is determined that the winning ball 10 count signal has been input (determining that the winning ball 10 count signal has been input continuously for 4 ms), the CPU 56 outputs the winning ball signal output. The number counter is loaded (step S1086), and the prize ball signal output number counter is incremented by 1 (step S1087). The prize ball signal output frequency counter is a counter that counts the remaining number of prize ball signal outputs.

  Then, the CPU 56 loads a prize ball signal output timer (step S1088), reflects the state of the prize ball signal output timer in the flag register (step S1089), and determines whether or not a prize ball signal is being output. (Step S1090). The prize ball signal output timer is a timer for measuring an on time and an off time (on time 100 ms and off time 100 ms described later) of the prize ball signal. If the value of the prize ball signal output timer is not 0, it is determined that a prize ball signal is being output. If the value of the prize ball signal output timer is 0, it is determined that no prize ball signal is being output.

  If the winning ball signal is being output (Y in step S1090), the process proceeds to step S1097. If the prize ball signal is not being output (N in step S1090), the CPU 56 loads the prize ball signal output number counter (step S1091), and reflects the state of the prize ball signal output number counter in the flag register (step S1091). S1092), it is determined whether there is a remaining number of output of the prize ball signal (step S1093).

  If there is no remaining number of outputs of the prize ball signal (Y in step S1093), the process proceeds to step S1102. If there is a remaining number of prize ball signal outputs (N in Step S1093), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the prize ball signal output number counter (Step S1094), and outputs the result of the computation (the result of 1 subtraction) as a prize ball signal output. Store in the number counter (step S1095). Then, the game information signal operating time 1 (100) is set in the register (step S1096). The game information signal operating time 1 (100) is a time for which a 2 ms timer interrupt is executed 100 times, that is, a time of 0.200 seconds (200 ms).

  Next, if the game information signal operation time 1 is not set in step S1096, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the prize ball signal output timer, and if the game information signal operation time 1 is set in step S1096, the game information signal operation is performed. The time 1 is decremented by 1 (step S1097). Then, the calculation result (the result obtained by subtracting 1) is stored in the prize ball signal output timer (step S1098).

  The CPU 56 compares the calculation result (remaining time of the prize ball signal output timer) with the game information signal output time 1 determination value (50) (step S1099), and the remaining time of the prize ball signal output timer is the game information signal output time 1 It is determined whether the time is shorter than the determination value (50) (step S1100). The game information signal output time 1 determination value (50) is a time for which a 2 ms timer interrupt is executed 50 times, that is, a time of 0.100 seconds (100 ms).

  When the remaining time of the prize ball signal output timer is not shorter than the game information signal output time 1 determination value, that is, the remaining time of the prize ball signal output timer is longer than the game information signal output time 1 determination value (100 ms). (N in step S1100), the CPU 56 sets the prize ball information signal output bit position of the information buffer (bit 0 of the output port 4 in the example shown in FIG. 11) (step S1101). When the prize ball information signal output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in step S1125, and the output value is output to the output port 4 in step S1126, whereby the prize ball information signal is output to the output port. 4 is output.

  Through the processing in steps S1076 to S1101, the prize ball information signal is output to the hall computer based on the prize ball 10 count signal being input from the payout control board 37. That is, every time 10 winning balls are paid out, a winning ball information signal is output to the hall computer (10 pulses per pulse). Therefore, the hall computer can recognize the number of game balls paid out by the gaming machine.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the bit data of the door opening signal of the input port 1 (step S1102). Then, the door opening signal timer is loaded (step S1103). The door opening signal timer is a timer that determines the time during which the door opening signal is on.

  Then, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the bit data of the door opening signal is “1” (step S1104). If it is “1”, the door opening signal timer is incremented by 1 (step S1105). If not ("0"), the door opening signal timer is cleared to 0 (step S1106). Next, the CPU 56 compares the door opening signal timer with the switch-on determination value (2) (step S1107), and determines whether the door opening signal timer value matches the switch-on determination value (2) (step S1108). ). If the value of the door opening signal timer does not coincide with the switch-on determination value (2) (Y in step S1108), the process proceeds to step S1111. If they match (N in step S1108), it is determined that the door opening signal has been input (determining that the door opening signal has been input continuously for 4 ms), and the CPU 56 loads the door opening signal output number counter. (Step S1109), the door opening signal output number counter is incremented by 1 (Step S1110). The door opening signal output number counter is a counter that counts the remaining number of door opening signal outputs.

  The CPU 56 loads the door opening signal output timer (step S1111), reflects the state of the door opening signal output timer in the flag register (step S1112), and determines whether the door opening signal is being output. (Step S1113). The door opening signal output timer is a timer for measuring an on time and an off time (on time 100 ms and off time 100 ms described later) of the door opening signal. If the value of the door opening signal output timer is not 0, it is determined that the door opening signal is being output. If the value of the door opening signal output timer is 0, it is determined that the door opening signal is not being output.

  If the door opening signal is being output (Y in step S1113), the process proceeds to step S1120. If the door opening signal is not being output (N in step S1113), the CPU 56 loads the door opening signal output number counter (step S1114), and reflects the state of the door opening signal output number counter in the flag register (step S1114). S1115), it is determined whether there is a remaining number of output times of the door opening signal (step S1116).

  If there is no remaining door opening signal output count (Y in step S1116), the process proceeds to step S1125. If there is a remaining number of output times of the door opening signal (N in Step S1116), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the door opening signal output number counter (Step S1117), and outputs the calculation result (the result of subtracting 1) to the door opening signal. Store in the number counter (step S1118). Then, the game information signal operating time 2 (100) is set in the register (step S1119). The game information signal operating time 2 (100) is a time for which a 2 ms timer interrupt is executed 100 times, that is, a time of 0.200 seconds (200 ms).

  Next, if the game information signal operation time 2 is not set in step S1119, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the door opening signal output timer, and if the game information signal operation time 2 is set in step S1119, the game information signal operation is performed. The time 2 is decremented by 1 (step S1120). Then, the calculation result (the result obtained by subtracting 1) is stored in the door opening signal output timer (step S1121).

  The CPU 56 compares the calculation result (remaining time of the door opening signal output timer) with the game information signal output time 2 determination value (50) (step S1122), and the remaining time of the door opening signal output timer is the gaming information signal output time 2 It is determined whether the time is shorter than the determination value (50) (step S1123). The game information signal output time 2 determination value (50) is a time for which a 2 ms timer interruption is executed 50 times, that is, a time of 0.100 seconds (100 ms).

  When the remaining time of the door opening signal output timer is not shorter than the game information signal output time 2 determination value, that is, the remaining time of the door opening signal output timer is longer than the gaming information signal output time 2 determination value (100 ms). (N in step S1123), the CPU 56 sets the door opening signal output bit position of the information buffer (bit 1 of the output port 4 in the example shown in FIG. 11) (step S1124). When the door opening signal output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in step S1125, and the output value is output to the output port 4 in step S1126. Is output.

  The door opening signal is output to the hall computer based on the input of the door opening signal from the payout control board 37 by the processing of steps S1102 to S1124 described above. Therefore, the hall computer can recognize that the gaming frame has been opened in the gaming machine.

  As long as the door opening signal is input from the payout control board 37, the door opening signal may be continuously output to the hall computer via the information terminal board 34. By doing so, it becomes unnecessary to manage the number of times the door opening signal is output, and the amount of information managed by the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced, thereby reducing the processing burden.

  Note that the definition of the above signals (contents that are meant when the signal is on) is an example, and different definitions may be used as long as the difference in jackpot type or gaming state can be recognized by the hall computer. Further, the number and types of signals are not limited to those described above.

  Next, the operation of the payout control means by the payout control microcomputer 370 will be described. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of output port assignment in the payout control microcomputer 370. As shown in FIG. 63, the output port 0 is an output port for outputting a signal of each phase supplied to the payout motor 289 by the stepping motor. The output port 1 is an output port for outputting a prize ball BUSY signal, a payout error signal, a ball dead signal, a full tank signal, a door open signal, and a prize ball count signal to the game control microcomputer 560. The output port 2 is an output port of each segment output of the error display LED 374 by 7 segment LED. The output port 3 is an output port for outputting a PRDY signal and an EXS signal to the card unit 50. The output ports 0, 1, 2, and 3 correspond to the output ports 372a, 372b, 372c, and 372d shown in FIG.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of input port bit assignment in the payout control microcomputer 370. As shown in FIG. 64, a 4-bit prize ball number signal is inputted to bits 0 to 3 of the input port 0, and a prize ball REQ from the main board 31 is inputted to bits 4, 5, 6 and 7, respectively. A signal, a power confirmation signal from the main board 31, a detection signal from the ball break switch 187, and a detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 295 are input. In addition, the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301, the operation signal from the error release switch 375, and the detection signal of the full switch 48 are input to bits 1 to 3 of the input port 1, respectively. The VL signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal from the card unit 50 are input to bits 4 to 6 of the input port 1, respectively. The output port 2 receives a power-off signal and a clear signal from the power supply board. The input ports 0, 1, and 2 correspond to the input ports 372e and 372f shown in FIG.

  Next, the operation of the payout control microcomputer 370 (specifically, the payout control CPU 371) will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the payout control means. In the main process, the payout control microcomputer 370 (specifically, the payout control CPU 371) first performs necessary initial settings. That is, the payout control CPU 371 first sets the interruption prohibition (step S7001). Next, an interrupt mode is set (step S7002), and a stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S7003). The payout control CPU 371 initializes the built-in device register (step S7004), and sets the RAM in an accessible state (step S705). Further, 0000 (H) is set as an initial value of the award ball unpaid number counter (step S7006).

  In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in the timer mode. Therefore, in the built-in device register setting process in step S7004, register setting for setting the channel to be used to timer mode, register setting for enabling interrupt generation, and register setting for setting an interrupt vector are performed. Is called. The interrupt by the channel is used as a timer interrupt. For example, when it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register).

  The interrupt vector set for the channel set to the timer mode corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt process is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. In the timer interrupt process, a payout control process for controlling the payout means (specifically, the processes in steps S752 to S759 by the timer interrupt process described later. At least a ball payout according to a command signal related to award ball payout from the main board. Including a process of driving the device 97, and a process of driving the ball dispensing device 97 in response to a ball lending request may be included.

  Next, the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch 921 input via the input port 2 is confirmed (step S7007). In the confirmation, when it is detected as ON, the payout control microcomputer 370 executes an initialization process (steps S7011 to S7013). If the clear signal is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (Step S7008). Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined by the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process included in the power supply stop process described later. It is confirmed by whether or not the value is appropriate (for example, 2). Note that such a confirmation method is merely an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in step S7008. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined in step S7008 that the power supply stop process has been performed, the payout control CPU 371 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S7009). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the payout control CPU 371 inverts the value of each bit in the contents of the checksum data area, and uses the inverted data as a checksum.

  In the power supply stop process described later, the checksum is calculated by the same process as the above process, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S7009, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping power supply, so the payout control state restoration processing is not executed, and the initialization processing (steps S7011 to S7013) is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the payout control CPU 371 performs payout control state recovery processing. Specifically, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter formed in the backup RAM is set as the award ball unpaid number counter initial value (step S7010). And the process after step S7012 is performed.

  In the initialization process, the payout control microcomputer 370 first performs a RAM clear process (step S7011). In addition, initial values are set in the flags and counters of the RAM area (step S7012). The process of step S7012 includes a process of setting the initial value of the award ball unpaid number counter in the award ball unpaid number counter. Accordingly, when the payout control state restoration process (step S7010) is executed, the value of the unsold prize ball number counter stored in the backup RAM is set again in the unsold prize ball number counter. In other words, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter stored in the backup RAM is used as it is.

  Since interruption is prohibited in step S7001 of the initial setting process, a state in which interruption is permitted is set before the initialization process is completed (step S7014). Thereafter, a loop process for monitoring the occurrence of a timer interrupt is entered.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 370 is set to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. When a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control microcomputer 370 executes a timer interrupt process.

  In the case where the configuration is such that the prize ball BUSY signal is continuously output during the payout, the power supply is supplied after a plurality of prize ball number signals are transmitted and the total prize ball number on the game control microcomputer 560 side is subtracted. Even if a disconnection occurs, it does not cause an excessive disadvantage to the player. Therefore, in such a case, it is not necessary to perform processing such as storing the value of the award ball unpaid-out counter in the backup RAM when the power is turned off.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the payout control means (the payout control microcomputer 370). In the timer interruption process, the payout control CPU 371 executes a power-off process (including a power supply stop process) for monitoring whether or not a power-off signal is output (step S751). Thereafter, a payout control process after step S752 is executed. In the payout control process, the payout control CPU 371 (the payout control microcomputer 370) first performs an input determination process (step S752). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of the input port 0 and the input port 1 and reflecting the detection result in predetermined two bytes of the RAM (referred to as an input state flag). In the payout control process, when control is performed based on the states of the input port 0 and the input port 1, the state of the input state flag is checked instead of directly checking the state of the input port. In the input determination process, the payout control CPU 371 also performs a process of transmitting the input data of the input ports 0 and 1 to the main board 31.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes a payout motor control process (step S753). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the patterns of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  Also, the payout control CPU 371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 50 (step S754). Next, the payout control CPU 371 executes main control communication processing for communicating with the game control means of the main board 31 (step S755). Further, a prize ball lending control process for performing a control for paying out a lending ball in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 50 and performing a control for paying out the number of award balls indicated by a prize ball number signal from the main board. Is executed (step S756).

  Then, the payout control CPU 371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S757). Further, the payout control CPU 371 executes a display control process for performing a predetermined display on the error display LED 374 according to the result of the error process (step S758).

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. The contents of the buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer, and output port 3 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer, and output port 3 buffer are a payout motor control process (step S753), a prepaid card unit control process (step S754), a main control communication process (step S755), and information output. It is updated in the process (step S758) and the display control process (step S759).

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the main control communication process in step S755. In the main control communication process, the payout control microcomputer 370 (specifically, the payout control CPU 371) executes any one of steps S1531 to S1533 in accordance with the value of the main control communication control code.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a main control communication normal process (step S1531) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 0. In the main control communication normal process, the payout control microcomputer 370 (specifically, the payout control CPU 371) indicates that the error bit (main control unconnected error bit or prize ball REQ signal error bit) is on. Ends the process without executing the subsequent processes (step S1541). In step S1541, if any one of the two bits in the error flag is set, it is determined that the error bit is set.

  In step S1541, the payout control microcomputer 370 checks whether a payout error such as a prize ball error or a prize ball shortage error has occurred in addition to the main control disconnection error or the prize ball REQ signal error. You may make it do. In this case, for example, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines that a prize ball error or a prize ball shortage error has occurred (see steps S3716A to S3716D and S3747 to S3750), a signal indicating a payout error is output. Output to 370. The payout control microcomputer 370 sets the payout error bit of the error bit to ON based on the input of the signal indicating the payout error. In step S1541, it is confirmed whether or not the payout error bit of the error bit is turned on in addition to the main control unconnected error bit and the winning ball REQ signal error bit.

  If the BRDY signal is on, the payout control CPU 371 ends the process without executing the subsequent processes (step S1542). That the BRDY signal is on means that a ball lending request is generated from the card unit 50. That is, when a ball lending request is generated, communication with the game control means of the main board 31 (communication relating to prize ball payout) does not proceed.

  If the conditions of steps S1541 to S1542 are not satisfied and the power supply confirmation signal is on, the payout control CPU 371 confirms whether or not the prize ball REQ signal is on (steps S1543 and S1544). . If the prize ball number signal is on, the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number signal is added to the contents of the prize ball unpaid number counter (step S1545), and the process for turning on the prize ball BUSY signal is performed. (Step S1546). Specifically, the bit corresponding to the prize ball BUSY signal in the output port 1 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 1 is set to the on state. Then, the winning ball BUSY signal output time (10 in this example) is set in the main control communication control timer (step S1547), the value of the main control communication control code is set to 1 (step S1548), and the process is terminated. The main control communication control timer is a timer used for monitoring the time related to communication with the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. At this stage, the timing for turning off the prize ball BUSY signal is set. The award ball BUSY signal output time is set. The prize ball unpaid-out number counter is formed in a non-volatile (power-backed up in this example) RAM area.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing main control communication processing (step S1532) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 1. In the main control communication process, the payout control microcomputer 370 (specifically, the payout control CPU 371) confirms the state of the prize ball REQ signal if the power confirmation signal is on (step S1551) (step S1551). Step S1552). If the prize ball REQ signal is off, the prize ball REQ signal error bit in the error flag is set (step S1553). This is because it is strange that the prize ball REQ signal is immediately turned off at this stage.

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks the value of the main control communication control timer (step S1554), and if not 0, subtracts 1 from the value of the main control communication control timer (step S1555) and ends the process. If the value of the main control communication control timer is 0, processing for turning off the prize ball BUSY signal is performed. Specifically, the bit corresponding to the prize ball BUSY signal in the output port 1 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 1 is set to the OFF state (step S1556). Also, a prize ball REQ signal OFF monitoring time (24 in this example) is set in the main control communication control timer (step S1557). Then, the value of the main control communication control code is set to 2 (step S1558), and the process ends.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing main control communication end processing (step S1533) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 2. In the main control communication process, the payout control microcomputer 370 (specifically, the payout control CPU 371) has an error bit (main control unconnected error bit or prize ball REQ signal error bit) turned on. Shifts to step S1567 (step S1561). Also when the power confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step S1567 (step S1562). If both error bits are off and the power confirmation signal is on, it is confirmed whether or not the prize ball REQ signal is off (step S1563). When it is turned off, the process proceeds to step S1567.

  If the prize ball REQ signal is not turned off, the value of the main control communication control timer is confirmed (step S1564). If the value of the main control communication control timer is not 0, the value of the main control communication control timer is decremented by 1 (step S1565). If the value of the main control communication control timer is 0, it is determined that the prize ball REQ signal has not been turned off within the monitoring time, and the prize ball REQ signal error bit is set in the error flag (step S1566). Transition.

  In step S1567, the value of the main control communication control code is set to 0, and the process ends.

  71 and 72 are flowcharts showing the prize ball lending control processing in step S756. In the winning ball lending control process, the payout control CPU 371 confirms that the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is turned on (step S1601), and lends whether or not the paid gaming ball is a winning ball. It is confirmed whether it is a sphere (steps S1602, S1603). In this example, whether or not the game ball is a prize ball is confirmed based on whether or not the current payout control state is a prize ball. Whether or not a prize ball is in progress is confirmed, for example, by whether or not a prize ball operating flag in the payout control state flag formed in the RAM is set (step S1602). Further, whether or not the game ball is a rental ball is confirmed based on whether or not the current payout control state is a ball rental. Whether or not the ball is being lent is confirmed, for example, by whether or not the ball renting operation bit in the payout control state flag formed in the RAM is set (step S1603).

  If it is in the winning ball, the value of the payout number counter for counting the accumulated number of winning balls is incremented by 1 (step S1605), and the value of the unpaid ball number counter is decreased by 1 (step S1606). If it is not in the winning ball but in the ball lending, the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter is decremented by 1 (step S1604). If the game ball is not being lent or not being lent, it is assumed that the game ball that has been paid out is a prize ball, and the value of the payout number counter is incremented by 1 (step S1605). Decrease by 1 (step S1606).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the payout number counter is 10 or more (step S1608). If the value of the payout number counter is not 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S1612 without transmitting the prize ball 10 count signal. That is, in this embodiment, instead of transmitting a signal to the game control microcomputer 560 each time a prize ball is detected, the prize ball 10 count signal is game controlled after accumulating 10 prize balls and detecting them. To the microcomputer 560. If the value of the payout number counter is 10 or more (Y in step S1608), the payout control CPU 371 turns on the prize ball 10 count signal for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds, see FIG. 42) (step). S1610). Further, the payout control CPU 371 subtracts 10 from the value of the payout number counter (step S1611).

  Next, the payout control CPU 371 sets the payout ball detection bit of the payout control state flag formed in the RAM (step S1612). The payout ball detection bit is a game regardless of whether the payout motor 289 is driven in one payout ball payout process (up to 15 balls) or one ball lending process (25 payouts) in the payout passing waiting process. This is used to detect that no sphere has passed through the payout number counting switch 301.

  Thereafter, the payout control CPU 371 executes any one of steps S6500 to S6502 according to the value of the payout control code.

  As described above, in this example, the prize ball 10 count signal is transmitted on condition that the value of the payout number counter is 10 or more.

  In the prize ball lending control process, the error bit is checked to determine whether or not to perform a payout operation (one prize ball payout or one ball lending) as shown in FIG. Only in the payout start waiting process. That is, the confirmation process of the payout number count switch 301, the subtraction process of the unpaid number counter, the output process of the prize ball count signal, and the like shown in FIG. 71 are executed without checking the error bit. Therefore, even if an error occurs, the ball lending unpaid-out counter or the winning ball unpaid-out counter is subtracted in accordance with the detection output from the paid-out count switch 301, and the value of the award ball unpaid-out counter Is subtracted, a prize ball 10 count signal is output. Therefore, the number of unpaid game balls can be managed even in an error state. Even if an error state occurs, a prize ball 10 count signal can be output in response to detection of award ball payout, so that even in an error state, it is detected on the payout control board 37 side. The information indicating that the prize ball has been paid out can be transmitted to the main board 31 side.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a payout start waiting process (step S6500) executed when the payout control code is 0. In the payout start waiting process, the payout control CPU 371 does not execute the subsequent process if an error bit (one or more of all error bits in the error flag) is set (step S1621). The error flag is formed in the RAM.

  On the other hand, if the BRDY signal is not in the ON state, the process for paying out a prize ball after step S1631 is executed. If the BRDY signal is on and the BRQ signal, which is a ball lending request signal, is on, a ball lending operation flag is set (steps S1623 and S1624). Then, “25” is set in the unpaid ball lending number counter (step S1625), and “25” is set in the payout motor rotation number buffer (step S1626).

  The payout motor rotation frequency buffer is referred to in the payout motor control process (step S753). That is, in the payout motor control process, control is performed to rotate the payout motor 289 by the number of rotations corresponding to the value set in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer.

  Thereafter, the payout control CPU 371 sets a value (specifically “1”) corresponding to the payout motor activation preparation process to the payout motor control code for selecting the process executed in the payout motor control process (step 1). In step S1627, the value of the payout control code is set to 1 (step S1628), and the process ends.

  In the payout motor control processing, the payout control CPU 371 performs payout motor normal processing (processing such as setting the pointer at the head address of the table stored in the ROM), payout, according to the value of the payout motor control code. Motor startup preparation processing (processing such as setting the initial value of the excitation pattern in bits 4 to 7 of the port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0), payout motor slow-up processing (smooth start of the payout motor 289) Therefore, the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table are read out at an interval longer than that in the case of constant speed processing and gradually approaching the time interval in the case of constant speed processing, and output from the output port 0 Processing such as setting bits 4 to 7 in the port 0 buffer corresponding to the state), dispensing motor constant speed processing (periodic dispensing motor excitation pattern) Processing to read out the contents of the data table and set bits 4 to 7 in the port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0), the payout motor brake process (in order to smoothly stop the payout motor 289) Port 0 corresponding to the output state of output port 0 by reading out the contents of the dispensing motor excitation pattern table at intervals longer than the processing and at a time interval gradually moving away from the time interval in the case of constant speed processing. Processing to set bits 4 to 7 of the buffer) and ball motor payout motor brake processing (in the case of rotation to release ball biting, the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table are read and output from output port 0) Any one of the processes (set to bits 4 to 7 of the port 0 buffer corresponding to the state) is executed.

  In step S1631, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the value of the award ball non-payout counter is 0 (step S1631). If 0, the process ends. The award ball unpaid-out counter is a value other than 0 when the communication related to the payout command signal is normally completed with the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31 in the main control communication end process. The number indicated by the prize ball number signal) is added. If the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is not 0, it is confirmed whether it is 15 or more (step S1632). If it is less than 15, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is set in the payout motor rotation count buffer (step S1633), and if it is 15 or more, “15” is set in the payout motor rotation count buffer (step S1634). . Then, a winning ball moving flag is set (step S1635), and the process proceeds to step S1627.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a payout motor stop waiting process (step S6501) executed when the payout control code is 1. In the payout motor stop waiting process, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the payout operation is completed (step S1641). Specifically, the payout control CPU 371 checks whether or not the control code in the payout motor control process (see step S753) is a value indicating stop of the payout motor 289.

  When the payout operation is completed, the payout control CPU 371 sets the payout passing monitoring time in the payout control monitoring timer (step S1642). The payout passing monitoring time is a time that has a margin in the time from when the last payout ball is paid out by the payout motor 289 until it passes through the payout number count switch 301. Then, the value of the payout control code is set to 2 (step S1643), and the process ends.

  75 to 77 are flowcharts showing a payout passing waiting process (step S6502) executed when the value of the payout control code is 2. In the payout passing waiting process, when a prize ball is being paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally if the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter is zero. If the value of the award ball unpaid-out counter is not 0, if it is not in an error state, a re-payout operation of one game ball is tried up to 2 times. In the re-payout operation, when it is detected by the payout number count switch 301 that the game ball is actually paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally. In this embodiment, the maximum number of game balls to be paid out in one prize ball payout operation is 15, and if the prize ball number signal is received during the prize ball payout, the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter is received. Therefore, even when the payout is completed normally, the value of the award ball non-payout number counter may not be 0.

  Further, when the ball lending is being paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally if the value of the ball lending unpaid-out counter is 0. If the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter is not 0, and if it is not in an error state, a re-payout operation of one game ball or the remaining number of ball lending (corresponding to the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter) Try. In this embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out in one ball lending and payout operation is 25 (fixed value), and the payout motor 289 is rotated so that 25 game balls are paid out. Therefore, when the value of the unpaid ball lending counter is not 0, the payout has not been completed normally.

  In the payout passing waiting process, the payout control CPU 371 first checks the value of the payout control timer, and if the value is 0, the process proceeds to step S1653 (step S1650). If the value of the payout control timer is not 0, the value of the payout control timer is decremented by 1 (step S1651). If the value of the payout control timer is not 0 (step S1652), that is, if the payout control timer has not timed out, the process is terminated.

  If the payout control timer has timed out (step S1652), it is confirmed whether or not a ball lending payout process (ball lending operation) has been executed (step S1653). Whether or not the ball lending operation has been executed is confirmed by whether or not the ball lending operation in-progress bit formed in the RAM is set (see steps S1623 and S1624). When the ball lending operation is not executed, that is, when the prize ball payout process (prize ball operation) is executed, the payout control microcomputer 370 confirms the value of the award ball unpaid number counter ( Step S1654). When the value of the winning ball unpaid-out counter is 0, it is determined that the winning ball payout processing has been completed normally, and the payout ball detection bit in the payout control state flag, 1 bit during re-payout operation, and during re-payout operation 2 bits, the winning ball operating flag and the ball lending operating bit are reset (step S1655), the payout control code is set to 0 (step S1656), and the processing is terminated. This bit is set when the switch 301 is turned on, and indicates that the payout number counting switch 301 has detected at least one game ball during the payout operation. Further, 1 bit during the re-payout operation and 2 bits during the re-payout operation are control bits used when executing a re-payout process including two re-payout operations.

  The payout control CPU 371 determines that an error flag (specifically, a payout switch error error 1 bit, a payout switch error error 2 bit and a payout case error bit) when the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is not 0. (One or a plurality of bits) is not set (step S1659), and if the payout ball detection bit is not set (step S1661), the re-payout operation is executed. To do. If the error flag is set, the re-payout operation is not executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when the payout is normally completed, the value of the award ball non-payout number counter may not be 0. Therefore, if the payout ball detection bit is set, that is, if the payout number count switch 301 detects the payout of at least one game ball during the award ball payout process, it is assumed that the award ball payout process is normally completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1655. In addition, for example, when 15 game balls should be paid out in one prize ball payout process, when only 14 game balls are actually paid out (the payout number count switch 301 has 14 game balls). In the case where it is detected only), the payout ball detection bit is set, so that it is considered that the award ball payout processing is normally completed. It should not have been done, and the shortage will be paid out in the next prize ball payout process, so there will be no disadvantage to the player.

  In order to execute the re-payout process, the pay-out control CPU 371 first checks whether or not 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S1662). If not set, it is confirmed whether or not 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S1663). If 1 bit is not set during re-payout operation, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations to execute the first re-payout operation (step S1664), and 1 bit is set during re-payout operation (step S1665). ) The value of the re-payout operation number or the ball lending unpaid-out number counter is set in the payout motor rotation number buffer (step S1666). The payout motor rotation frequency buffer is referred to in the payout motor control process (step S753). That is, in the payout motor control process, control is performed to rotate the payout motor 289 by the number of rotations corresponding to the value set in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer. In step S1666, the value of the unpaid ball lending number counter is also handled because step S1666 is used in the re-payout process in the lend-out process. That is, in step S1666, the payout control CPU 371 sets the re-payout operation number in the re-payout process in the prize ball payout process, and sets the value of the ball lending unpaid-out number counter in the re-payout process in the ball lending payout process. . Thereafter, the payout control code is set to 1 (step S1667), and the process is terminated.

  In step S1663, when it is confirmed that 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation, the payout control CPU 371 sets 1 as the re-payout operation number in order to execute the second re-payout (step S1668). Then, 1 bit is reset during the re-payout operation (step S1669), and 2 bits are set during the re-payout operation (step S1670). Then, control goes to a step S1666.

  In step S1662, if it is confirmed that 2 bits are set during the re-payout operation, the payout control CPU 371 does not pay out the game ball even if the re-payout process is executed twice (payout number count switch). 301 has detected no game ball), the payout case error bit in the error flag is set (step S1672). At that time, 2 bits are reset during the re-payout operation (step S1671). Then, the process ends.

  As described above, if one game ball is not paid out even if two re-payout operations are performed in the re-payout process (corrected payout process) related to the prize ball, the game ball is paid out as a defective game ball payout operation. Number count switch non-passing error bit (payout case error bit) is set. In addition, after a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) after the two re-payout operations are performed, the error state due to the payout operation failure is restored.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the payout control CPU 371 determines in advance when it detects that the game ball has not been paid out based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 301 as the payout detection means. The control is performed so that the payout means pays out one game ball up to a predetermined number of times (in this example, twice). In this embodiment, if the game ball is not paid out even if the retry operation for paying out the game ball is performed twice, the payout case error bit is set and an error is being generated. (Step S1672), the payout case error bit may be set when it is detected for the first time that the game ball has not been paid out. Note that “retry operation (or“ retry ”,“ retry operation processing ”) means that the actual payout number is the same as the normal payout processing for executing payout of a predetermined number of game balls. This is an operation to be executed when the number is small, and means an operation for executing the payout process again in order to pay out an unpaid game ball separately from the normal payout process.

  In the prize ball lending control process, the error bit is checked to determine whether or not to perform a payout operation (one prize ball payout or one ball lending). The payout start shown in FIG. Only in the waiting process. In the payout motor stop waiting process shown in FIG. 74 and the payout passing wait process shown in FIG. 75 and the like, the error bit is not checked. Note that the error bit is also checked in step S1659 or the like in the payout passing waiting process, but this check is for determining whether or not to perform a re-payout operation. This is not to determine whether or not to start the lending of the ball. Therefore, after the process of step S1626, S1633 or step S1634 is performed and the game ball payout process is started, the payout process is not interrupted even if an error occurs. In other words, when an error occurs, the game ball payout process is continued until a point at which the game ball can be cut well (at the time when one prize ball payout or one ball lending ends). The error bit in the error flag checked in step S1621 includes an error bit indicating that the power supply confirmation signal from the main board 31 has been turned off. Therefore, even when the power supply confirmation signal is turned off, the game ball payout process is stopped at a time when the turn is good. If an error occurs, the game ball payout process may be stopped immediately.

  Upon confirming that the ball lending / dispensing process (ball lending operation) has been executed in step S1653, the payout control CPU 371 confirms whether or not the value of the ball lending unpaid out counter is 0 (step S1657). . If it is 0, it is determined that the ball lending / dispensing process has been completed normally, and the process proceeds to step S1655.

  If it is determined in step S1657 that the value of the unpaid ball lending number counter is not 0, an error flag (specifically, any one of a payout switch abnormal error 1 bit, a payout switch abnormal error 2 bit, and a payout case error bit) Or one bit or a plurality of bits) is not set (step S1675), and the re-payout process is executed. If the error flag is set, the re-payout process is not executed.

  In order to execute the re-payout process, the pay-out control CPU 371 first confirms whether or not 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S1676). If not set, it is confirmed whether or not 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S1677). If 1 bit is not set during re-payout operation, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations to execute the first re-payout operation (step S1678), and 1 bit is set during re-payout operation (step S1679). ) After further resetting the payout ball detection bit (step S1680), the process proceeds to step S1666.

  In step S1677, when it is confirmed that 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation, the payout control CPU 371 performs a process for re-executing the re-payout operation. Specifically, 1 bit is reset during the re-payout operation (step S1681). If the payout ball detection bit is set, that is, if the game ball is paid out in the first re-payout operation, the process proceeds to step S1683. If the payout ball detection bit is not set, the process proceeds to step S1684 to execute the second re-payout operation.

  In step S1683, the payout ball detection bit is reset, and then the process proceeds to step S1666. Accordingly, in this case, since 1 bit remains set during the re-payout operation, the first (first) re-payout operation is performed again. In step S1684, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations (step S1684), 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S1585), and the process proceeds to step S1666.

  In step S1676, when it is confirmed that the 2 bits during re-payout operation are set, the payout control CPU 371 resets 2 bits during the re-payout operation (step S1686), and if the payout ball detection bit is set, That is, if the game ball has been paid out by the re-payout operation, the process proceeds to step S1683 and attempts to eliminate the remaining unpaid portion. If the payout ball detection bit is not set, it is determined that the game ball has not been paid out even if the re-payout process is executed twice (the payout number count switch 301 has not detected a game ball). A payout case error bit is set (step S1688). Then, the process ends.

  As described above, if one game ball is not paid out even if two re-payout operations are continuously performed in the re-payout processing (corrected payout processing) related to the ball lending process, a game ball payout operation is performed. As a failure, a payout count switch non-passing error bit (payout case error bit) is set. In this embodiment, the ball lending control process is executed with priority over the prize ball control process (the process after step S1631) (see step S1622), but the prize ball control process is performed over the ball lending control process. Priority may be given to execution. Further, after a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) after the two re-payout operations are performed, the error state due to the defective payout operation is restored.

  FIG. 78 is a timing chart for explaining the ball biting detection process executed in the payout motor control process (step S753). In the payout motor constant speed process in the payout motor control process, the payout control CPU 371 monitors the detection signal of the payout motor position sensor 295. The detection signal of the payout motor position sensor 295 is turned on twice, for example, every time the cam that rotates in conjunction with the payout motor 289 rotates once. In order for the detection signal to be output twice each time the cam rotates once, the cam has two locations in the portion that receives light from the light emitting portion in the payout motor position sensor 295 (positions symmetrical with respect to the axis). Is provided with a reflector. The output of the light receiving unit in the dispensing motor position sensor 295 is used as a detection signal.

  Therefore, even if the payout control CPU 371 gives an excitation pattern having a step number of 1/2 rotation or more to the payout motor 289, the detection signal of the payout motor position sensor 295 does not turn on. Actually, the payout motor 289 does not rotate due to foreign matter such as dust adhering to the cam portion and the like, and the game ball is clogged (ball biting has occurred). As a result, the cam rotates. It can be judged that it is not.

  In this embodiment, when the payout motor 289 receives an excitation pattern for 16 steps (2.087 ms per step), it makes one rotation and pays out one game ball. For example, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout control CPU 371 checks the detection signal of the payout motor position sensor 295 every time the payout motor CPU 371 gives an excitation pattern for 8 steps to the payout motor 289. Thus, it is determined whether or not the payout motor 289 is rotating. Then, if the same state is detected five times continuously (the detection signal of the dispensing motor position sensor 295 is turned off five times continuously or turned on five times continuously), it is determined that ball engagement has occurred. A ball biting release process is executed. In this case, specifically, when the dispensing control CPU 371 detects the occurrence of the ball engagement, it brakes the drive of the dispensing motor 289, reads the excitation pattern for detecting the ball engagement, and sets the output state of the output port 0. The corresponding port 0 buffer bits 4 to 7 are set, and the payout motor start preparation process and the payout motor constant speed process are executed. Such control makes it unnecessary to provide a process for releasing the ball bite separately from the payout motor start preparation process and the payout motor constant speed process, and can prevent an increase in the program capacity.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the payout control CPU 371 repeats a process of rotating the payout motor 289 at a high speed and a process of rotating it at a medium speed for a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times). Each time an excitation pattern for 8 steps is given to the payout motor 289, the detection signal of the payout motor position sensor 295 is checked to determine whether the payout motor 289 is rotating. This determination process is specifically executed in a ball biting determination process executed during the payout motor constant speed process. If it is determined by the detection signal that the rotation of the payout motor 289 has been restored, the ball biting release processing is terminated and the normal ball payout processing is returned to.

  If there is no change in the detection signal of the payout motor position sensor 295 even if the high speed rotation process and the medium speed rotation process are executed a predetermined number of times, the ball biting error bit (payout case error bit) of the error flag is displayed. ) Is set. When the payout case error bit is set, the payout control CPU 371 does not drive the payout motor 289. When the payout case error bit is reset (see step S1807 in FIG. 81), the payout control CPU 371 returns to a state where the payout motor 289 can be driven.

  Thus, the payout control means includes a drive state monitoring means for monitoring the operating state of the payout means, and a drive stop means for stopping the driving of the payout means when the drive state monitoring means detects a malfunction of the payout means. Including.

  Next, error processing will be described. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the type of error and the display of the LED 374 for error display. As shown in FIG. 80, when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 31 is turned off, the payout control CPU 371 displays “1” on the error display LED 374 as a main board non-connection error. I do. When the disconnection of the payout number count switch 301 or a ball clogging occurs in the payout number count switch 301, the error display LED 374 is controlled to display “2” as the payout switch abnormality detection error 1. The disconnection of the payout number count switch 301 or the occurrence of ball clogging in the payout number count switch 301 is determined by the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 not being turned off.

  When the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is turned on even though the game ball is not paying out, control is performed to display “3” on the error display LED 374 as the payout switch abnormality detection error 2. Do. If the detection signal of the payout count switch 301 does not turn on despite the rotation abnormality of the payout motor 289 or the game ball being paid out, “4” is displayed on the error display LED 374 as a payout case error. Control. The specific method for detecting that the detection signal of the payout number count switch 301 is not turned on is as described above. When the prize ball REQ signal is turned on at an improper timing or when the prize ball REQ signal is turned off at an improper timing, “5” is displayed in the error display LED 374 as a prize ball REQ signal error. Control to display. A specific method for detecting that the prize ball REQ signal is turned on or off at an incorrect timing is as described above.

  In addition, when the lower pan is full, that is, when the full switch 48 is turned on, control is performed to display “6” on the error display LED 374 as a full error. When the supply ball is insufficient, that is, when the ball break switch 187 is turned on, control is performed to display “7” on the error display LED 374 as a ball break error.

  Further, when the VL signal from the card unit 50 is turned off, control is performed to display “8” on the error display LED 374 as a prepaid card unit non-connection error. When communication is made with the card unit 50 at an incorrect timing, control is performed to display “9” on the error display LED 374 as a prepaid card unit communication error. The prepaid card unit communication error is detected in the prepaid card unit control process (step S754).

  Among the above errors, after the occurrence of a payout switch abnormality detection error 2, a payout case error or a prize ball REQ signal error, the error release switch 375 is operated and an operation signal is output from the error release switch 375 (becomes turned on). The payout control means returns to the state before the error occurred.

  81 and 82 are flowcharts showing the error processing in step S757. In the error processing, the payout control CPU 371 checks the error flag, and the set bits are only payout switch abnormality detection error 2, payout case error and prize ball REQ signal error (any one of the three). It is confirmed whether it is only a bit, or only 2 bits out of 3 (or only 3 bits thereof) (step S1801). If these are the only bits that are set, it is checked whether or not the operation signal has been turned on from the error release switch 375 (step S1802). When the operation signal is turned on, the error recovery time is set in the pre-error recovery timer (step S1803). The error recovery time is the time from when the error release switch 375 is operated until the actual return from the error state to the normal state.

  If the operation signal from the error release switch 375 is not on, the value of the timer before error recovery is confirmed (step S1804). If the value of the timer before error recovery is 0, that is, if the timer before error recovery is not set, the process proceeds to step S1808. If the pre-error return timer is set, the value of the pre-error return timer is decremented by -1 (step S1805). If the pre-error return timer value becomes 0 (step S1806), the payout switch of the error flags is set. Bits of abnormality detection error 2, payout case error and prize ball REQ signal error are reset (step S1807), and the process proceeds to step S1808.

  When the processing of step S1807 is executed, there may be an error bit that is not in the set state among the bits of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2, the payout case error, and the winning ball REQ signal error. There is no problem resetting error bits that are not in the state. As described above, in this embodiment, when an error (see FIG. 80) that causes the setting of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2, the payout case error, or the prize ball REQ signal error bit occurs, an error occurs. The error is released when the release switch 375 is pressed.

  In this example, even in the error state, the processes of steps S1601 to S1618 shown in FIG. 71 are executed. That is, even when an error related to payout occurs, if the game ball passes the payout number count switch 301, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter or the ball lending unpaid number counter is subtracted. Therefore, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter or the ball lending unpaid number counter when returning from the error state is a value reflecting the number of game balls actually paid out. That is, even if an error related to payout occurs, the number of game balls actually paid out can be accurately managed.

  Even when it is confirmed that the game ball has passed the payout number count switch 301 during the error state, the payout case error bit is not reset. The bit of the payout case error is reset only when the error release switch 375 is operated (specifically, when the error return time after operation elapses) (steps S1802 and S1807). That is, the state of the payout case error (payout shortage error) is not automatically canceled based on the fact that the game ball has passed the payout number count switch 301, etc. The error is not cleared. Therefore, the game store clerk and the like can surely recognize that a shortage of payout has occurred.

  When the error cancel switch 375 is operated so as to be reset in hardware (reset to the payout control CPU 371), the error cancel switch 375 is operated, for example, a prize ball has not been paid out. The value of the number counter is also cleared. However, in this embodiment, since the payout control means is configured to perform the re-payout operation again by operating the error release switch 375, the payout process is executed reliably, which is disadvantageous to the player. Can not be given.

  In step S 1808, the payout control CPU 371 checks the detection signal of the full tank switch 48. If the detection signal of the full tank switch 48 is output (if it is in the ON state), the full tank error bit in the error flag is set (step S1809). If the detection signal of the full tank switch 48 is OFF, the full tank error bit is reset (step S1810).

  Also, the payout control CPU 371 checks the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 (step S1811). If the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is output (if it is on), the ball break error bit in the error flag is set (step S1812). If the detection signal of the ball break switch 187 is OFF, the ball break error bit is reset (step S1813). When the ball break error bit is set, the bit corresponding to the ball break LED 52 in the output port 1 buffer is set to a value corresponding to the lighting state in the display control process of step S758.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 82, the payout control CPU 371 checks the state of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 31 (step S1815). If the connection confirmation signal is not output (if it is in the off state), The main board unconnected error bit is set (step S1816). If the connection confirmation signal is output (if it is on), the main board unconnected error bit is reset (step S1817).

  Further, the payout control CPU 371 checks the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 301 among the switch timers in which the state of the detection signal of each switch is set, and the value is the switch on maximum time (for example, “ 240 ") (step S1818), the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 1 is set in the error flag (step S1819). If the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout count switch 301 is equal to or shorter than the switch-on maximum time, the payout switch abnormality detection error 1 bit is reset (step S1820). It should be noted that the value of each switch timer is incremented by 1 when the state of the input port to which the detection signal of each switch is input is switched on in the input determination process of step S752, and cleared by 0 when it is off. Accordingly, the fact that the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 301 exceeds the maximum switch-on time means that the payout number count switch 301 is in the ON state beyond the maximum switch-on time. Then, it is determined that the game ball is clogged at the disconnection of the payout number count switch 301 or at the portion of the payout number count switch 301.

  Further, the payout control CPU 371, when the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout count switch 301 becomes a switch-on determination value (eg, “2”) (step S1821), the ball lending operation flag and the winning ball operation If both the middle flags are in the reset state, the game ball passes through the payout number count switch 301 even though the payout operation is not in progress, and the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 is set in the error flag (steps S1822, S1823). . If the ball lending operation flag or the winning ball operation flag is set, the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 is reset (step S1824).

  Further, the payout control CPU 371 checks the input state of the VL signal from the card unit 50 (step S1825). If the VL signal is not input (if it is in the OFF state), the prepaid card unit not yet out of the error flags is displayed. A connection error bit is set (step S1826). If the VL signal is input (if it is on), the prepaid card unit unconnected error bit is reset (step S1827).

  Also, the payout control CPU 371 confirms the state of a predetermined error bit (in this example, a full tank error bit, a ball out error bit) in the error flag (step S1828a), and any one of the predetermined error bits If the error bit is set, the payout error signal is turned on (step S1828b). If all the predetermined error bits are in the reset state, the payout error signal is turned off (step S1828c).

  In the display control process of step S758, notification by display (numerical value display) corresponding to the error bit in the error flag is performed by the error display LED 374. In this embodiment, the game control means mounted on the main board 31 and the payout control means mounted on the payout control board 37 perform bi-directional communication with respect to prize ball payout, but a communication error is indicated by an error display LED 374. Can be notified.

  In addition, since the communication error is detected on the payout control means side, even if the game control means and the payout control means perform bi-directional communication with respect to the prize ball payout, the communication without increasing the burden on the game control means. Can detect errors.

  In this embodiment, the main board non-connection error is automatically canceled when the connection confirmation signal is turned on (see steps S1815 and S1817), but a condition that the error release switch 375 is further operated is added. Thus, the error state may be eliminated.

  In this embodiment, a communication error is reported so as to be distinguishable from a communication error with the card unit 50 (a prepaid card unit unconnected error and a prepaid card unit communication error) and other errors (see FIG. 80). ). Therefore, a communication error between the game control unit and the payout control unit is easily identified.

  FIG. 83A is a timing chart showing how a payout case error (payout shortage error) occurs, and FIG. 83B is a timing chart showing a state when the error release switch 375 is operated.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (A), the payout motor 289 is rotated to pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and after the stop of the rotation, the game ball that should have been paid out last passes the payout number count switch 301. Later (in this example, after 402 ms), it is confirmed whether or not there is an unpaid game ball. If there is an unpaid game ball, a re-payout operation is executed. FIG. 83 (A) shows an example in which two re-payout operations are executed. Then, when two re-payout operations are executed, it is determined as a payout case error, and “4” is displayed on the error display LED 374 by the display control process in step S758 (see FIG. 80).

  As shown in FIG. 83B, when the error release switch 375 is operated, the re-payout operation is started again after the error release time has elapsed. As shown in FIG. 83B, when the re-payout operation is started again, the display of “4” on the error display LED 374 is erased. That is, when the corrected payout control is performed after the operation of the error release switch 375, a notification indicating an insufficient payout error is not performed.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the effect control process of steps S704 to S709.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, a first decorative symbol display control process is performed (step S706). In the first decorative symbol display control process, display control of the first decorative symbol display 9a is executed. Further, a second decorative symbol display control process is performed (step S707). In the second decorative symbol display control process, display control of the second decorative symbol display 9b is executed. Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S708). Furthermore, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number used for determining a production mode or the like is executed (step S709). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702. As in the special symbol process executed by the game control microcomputer 560, the first ornament symbol display control process and the second ornament symbol display control process are made common, that is, realized by one program module. Thus, the capacity of the program executed by the production control microcomputer 100 may be reduced.

  85 and 86 are flowcharts showing a specific example of command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in a command reception buffer formed in the RAM (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step S612). When reading is performed, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  As the command reception buffer, for example, a command reception buffer in a ring buffer format capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in the command reception buffer. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 33) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result specifying command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the display result specifying command (one of display result 1 specifying command to display result 5 specifying command) in the RAM. The displayed display result specifying command storage area is stored (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S624). If the received effect control command is a small hit / surprise start designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / surprise start designation command reception flag (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S627), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S629), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S630).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  Further, if the received production control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command or a jackpot end 2 designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S642). If the received effect control command is a small hit / abrupt end specification command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / abrupt end specification command reception flag (step S644).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (step S645), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag (step S646). If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big prize opening (step S647), the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big prize opening (step S648).

  If the received effect control command is a prize ball error command (step S649), the effect control CPU 101 superimposes and displays a prize ball error notification display on the effect display device 9 (step S650). For example, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to superimpose and display a character string such as “prize ball error occurrence” on the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, even when a step-up notice effect, which will be described later, is executed on the effect display device 9, when the prize ball error command is received, the effect control CPU 101 performs the step-up notice. Control is performed to superimpose a prize ball error notification display on the effect screen.

  If the received effect control command is a prize ball shortage error command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 superimposes and displays a prize ball shortage error notification display on the effect display device 9 (step S652). For example, the CPU 101 for effect control performs control to superimpose and display a character string such as “occurrence of insufficient prize ball error” on the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, even when a step-up notice effect, which will be described later, is executed on the effect display device 9, when the prize ball shortage error command is received, the effect control CPU 101 steps up. Control is performed to superimpose and display a prize shortage error notification display on the effect screen of the notice effect.

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S653). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variable display mode of decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol). In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol display 9a and the second decorative symbol display 9b are composed of two LEDs. And as shown in FIG. 87, it lights alternately every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 second). When the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the upper LED is turned on as a display result of a decorative symbol reminiscent of the jackpot (see FIG. 87A). Further, when the display result of the special symbol is changed to the off symbol, the lower LED is turned on as the display result of the decorative symbol reminiscent of the off symbol (see FIG. 87B).

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 100. As shown in FIG. 88, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 includes random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, random numbers for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding. SR3, random number SR4-1 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of first pseudo change, random number SR4-2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of second pseudo change, random number SR5-1 for determining the first step-up notice, Random number SR5-2 for determining two-step-up advance notice, random number SR5-3 for determining advance notice of moving object, random number SR5-4 for determining button notice, random number SR5-5 for determining notice of frame, random number SR5 for determining notice of mini character -6, random number SR5-7 for determining blade mono notice, random number SR5-8 for determining other system liquid crystal notice, and random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect (slip) pattern. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the effect.

  The random number SR4-1 of the temporary stop symbol at the time of quasi-continuous first variation is an effect symbol (temporary stop display) in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R after the first change. The random number SR4-2 of the quasi-continuous second variation temporary stop symbol is “left”, “middle”, “right” after the subsequent re-variation to be executed. "Is a random number used to determine the effect symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R.

  The random number SR3 for determining the sliding temporary stop symbol is used for temporarily or partially in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R when the specific effect of “sliding” is executed. It is a random number used to determine the effect symbol (temporary stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed.

  Random number SR5-1 for determining the first step-up notice is a random number used for determining the content (presence / absence / effect mode) of the first step-up notice effect. Random number SR5-1 for determining the first step-up notice is a random number used for determining the content (presence / absence / effect mode) of the first step-up notice effect. The random number SR5-2 for determining the second step-up notice is a random number used for determining the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the second step-up notice effect. The random number SR5-3 for determining the moving object notice is a random number used to determine the content (presence / absence / effect form) of the moving object notice effect. Random number SR5-4 for button notice determination is a random number used for determining the contents (presence / absence / effect form) of the button notice effect. The frame notice determination random number SR5-5 is a random number used for determining the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the frame notice effect. The random number SR5-6 for determining the mini character notice is a random number used for determining the contents (presence / absence / effect form) of the mini character notice effect. The random number SR5-7 for determining the wing thing notice is a random number used to determine the content (presence / absence / effect form) of the wing thing notice. The random number SR5-8 for other system notice determination is a random number used to determine the contents (presence / absence / effect mode) of the other system notice effect. The contents of each notice effect will be described later.

  The random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is used to determine the specific effect pattern corresponding to the content of the effect operation when executing the specific effect of “slip” as one of a plurality of types. Random number.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, as a table for determining a predetermined non-reach combination, for example, a final stop symbol determination table shown in FIGS. 89 (A) to (D). 160A to 160D are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 89A is a left final stop that is a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to in order to determine the symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the symbol number “” of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included. The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 89B is a right final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the second final stop symbol determining random number SR1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160B includes the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared, and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 89C is a medium final stop that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among the predetermined effect symbols that are combinations of predetermined non-reach. It is a table referred to for determining the symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3.

  Further, the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100 includes a left / right turn determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 90, and includes a left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and a right final stop symbol FZ1-. From the combination with 2, determination is made as to which of the left and right output types DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, and LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C includes a random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol according to the determination result of whether the left / right outcome type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. Including the data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 89 (B), the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 are the same. Is not assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such an assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design combination can be prevented from being a reach combination or jackpot combination. Also, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 89C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined production symbols. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the part of the combination. For example, even if the combination is not a reach combination or a jackpot combination, the portion that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 16 or the portion that becomes a constant non-reach combination as shown in FIG. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the final stop symbol is not assigned. With such an assignment, when a finalized design that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the finalized design is a pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 or a certain non-reach similar to the chance. It can be made not to be a combination.

  In addition, in the determination table stored in the ROM of the production control microcomputer 100, for example, as shown in FIG. 92A and FIG. Final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B are included. The final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 92 (A) is a left final stop symbol FZ2 that becomes a final effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L among the final effect symbols that are combinations of reach deviation. -1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "right" symbol display area 9R, are determined based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table that is referred to. The final stop symbol determination table 162A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and is the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the same effect symbols (left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, FZ2-2). The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 92 (B) is a final final stop symbol FZ2- that becomes a finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C among the fixed effect symbols that are out of reach. 3 is a table referred to for determining 3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol. However, in FIG. 92 (B), the difference between the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 is shown as data that can specify the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3.

  That is, the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that constitutes the unreachable combination is specified by a symbol difference that is a difference value from the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 or the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. The That is, in the variable display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol variation is started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, and “left” → “right” → “middle”. When the finalized effect symbol that is the variable display result of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in this order, the “left” and “right” symbol displays other than the “medium” symbol display area 9C where the effect symbol is stopped and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the areas 9L and 9R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the "middle" symbol display is performed using the final stop symbol determination table 162B. A difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 stopped and displayed in the area 9C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the determined symbol difference, a definite effect symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C is determined. The final stop symbol determination table 162B is a variation pattern of normal PA2-1, normal PA2-2, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, or any of normal PA2-3 and normal PA2-4. If it is one of the fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-3, Super PB3-1 to PB3-3, Super PC3-1 to Super PC3-4, Special PG2-3, Super PA3- 4 is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol according to any of the fluctuation patterns of the super PA 3-6, and the symbol difference “− Data (determination values) corresponding to “2”, “−1”, “+1”, and “+2” are included.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, final stop symbol determination tables 163A and 163B shown in FIG. 93 are used as tables for determining a definite effect symbol that is one of the jackpot combinations. include. The final stop symbol determination tables 163A and 163B shown in FIG. 93 are left-stopped in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R as the determined effect symbols that become the big hit symbols. This table is referred to for determining the middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. The final stop symbol determination table 163A is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. Data corresponding to the symbol numbers “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, “7”, “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as -3 (determination value) including. The final stop symbol determination table 163B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1, and the left middle right final stop symbol FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3. -3 includes data (determination values) corresponding to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the same normal symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 163A is used when it is determined to be a probable variation big hit, and the final stop symbol determination table 163B is used when it is determined to be a normal big hit (non-probable variable big hit). used.

  In addition, the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 includes a specific effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 94, for example, as a table for determining one of a plurality of types of specific effect patterns. 164A is included. When the specific effect of “slip” is executed, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A shown in FIG. 94 slides the specific effect pattern based on the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern. It is a table referred to in order to determine any of the slips TP1-4. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A includes non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-6, super PA4-2, super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Special PG1-2, Special PG2-2, Special It is compared with the value of the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern according to the change pattern (see FIGS. 17 and 18) in which the specific effect of “slip” is executed, such as the change pattern of PG3-3. It is a numerical value (determination value), and data (determination value) corresponding to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 No.

  In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at high speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at high speed in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and then stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-varied to a low speed in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and then stopped and displayed in the “right” symbol display area 9R. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed. In the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4, after changing the effect symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, the “left” and “right” symbol display areas. After the effect symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at 9L and 9R, the effect symbols are re-fluctuated at a low speed in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and then stopped and displayed in the “left” symbol display area 9L. An effect display for changing the effect symbol to be performed is performed.

  For example, when the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-4, the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 according to the previous effect value (previous effect storage data: a value indicating the change pattern of the previous effect symbol). You may make it change distribution of. As an example, the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 that can be selected are changed according to which of the previous production values is 1 to 4. In addition, each of 1-4 assumes each of slip TP1-1-slip TP1-4. The effect control CPU 101 sets the previous effect value in the storage area in the RAM when the slip effect mode (slip TP1-1 to slip TP1-4) is determined. The specific effect pattern determination table 164A is a table to which a determination value is assigned so that the slip TP1-n is not selected when the previous determination value is n (any of n = 1 to 4). When the effect control CPU 101 determines the slip effect mode using the specific effect pattern determination table 164A configured as described above, the “slip” specific effect is executed according to the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4. In this case, it is possible to prevent the specific effect pattern from being the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time.

  Also, instead of changing the configuration of the specific effect pattern determination table 164A, the specific effect pattern that is the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time is not controlled by the control of the effect control CPU 101. You may make it do. In that case, the specific effect pattern determination table 164A illustrated in FIG. 94 is used, and the determined slip effect mode (slip TP1-1 to slip TP1-4) is specified by the previous determination value. If they match, the effect mode is replaced (for example, if the determined slip effect mode is slip TP1-n, it is replaced with slip TP1- (n + 1)).

  In addition, in the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, FIG. 95 is used as a table for determining an effect symbol to be temporarily stopped when a specific effect of “slip” is executed. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D shown in (A) to (D) are included. Each temporary stop symbol determination table 166A to 166D is used according to whether the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 according to the table selection rule as shown in FIG. Selected as a table. That is, when the specific performance pattern is the slip TP1-1, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A is selected as the usage table, and when the specific effect pattern is the slip TP1-2, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166B is selected as the usage table. In the case of the slip TP1-3, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166C is selected as the use table, and in the case of the slip TP1-4, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166D is selected as the use table. The temporary stop symbol determination tables 166A to 166D are used to determine a temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the symbol display area where the effect symbols are changed again. It is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3, and includes data (determination value) corresponding to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbols to be temporarily stopped symbols. That is, the temporary stop symbol determination table 166A has the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-1. According to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of slipping, and the effect symbol of the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1 Data (determination values) corresponding to symbol numbers “1” to “8” are included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166B has the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-2. In accordance with “1” to “8”, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol number of the effect symbol which becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2 Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166C has the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-3. In accordance with “1” to “8”, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-3 Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included. The temporary stop symbol determination table 166D has the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol as the final stop symbol in the “left” symbol display area 9L where the effect symbol is temporarily stopped according to the specific effect pattern of the slip TP1-4. In accordance with “1” to “8”, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding, and the symbol number of the effect symbol that becomes the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-4 Data (determination values) corresponding to “1” to “8” are included.

  In the determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, FIG. 96 is used as a table for determining the effect symbols that are temporarily stopped when the “pseudo-continuous” specific effect is executed. Temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C shown in (A) to (C) are included. Each of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C indicates that the variation pattern is non-reach PA1-5, super PA3-3, super PA3-6, super PA4- 3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3, or execution until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed Is selected as a use table according to the remaining number of re-variable display operations. For example, the remaining number of re-variable display operations is “0” in the variation of the effect design (pseudo continuous variation) in which the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, and the temporary stop symbol is stopped one time before that. The final stop is such that the displayed design symbol variation (pseudo-continuous variation) is “1”, and the temporary stop symbol variation is displayed twice before (“pseudo-continuous variation”) is “2”. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo-continuous variation (variation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed before the pseudo continuous variation in which the determined effect symbol that is the symbol is stopped and displayed is executed.

  As an example, the temporary stop symbol determination table 167A includes all revariable display operations that are executed until the final effect symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being non-reach PA1-5. When the remaining number of times is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” symbol display area 9L, and the right to be temporarily stopped in the “right” symbol display area 9R. The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2 as the symbol, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 as the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the “medium” symbol display area 9C are selected as the use table. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167B has a variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-6, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3 If the remaining number of re-variation display operations executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “1”, the symbol “left” is displayed. In the display area 9L, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed, the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol in the “right” symbol display area 9R, and the “middle” symbol. In the display area 9C, it is selected as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3 which is the intermediate symbol to be displayed for temporary stop.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C has a variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-6, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1. If the remaining number of all re-variable display operations to be executed until the finalized design symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “2” in response to being any of -3, “Left” In the symbol display area 9L, the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed, in the "right" symbol display area 9R, the right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped, is displayed. In the symbol display area 9C, the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 that is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed is selected as a use table.

  The temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 96 (A) and the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B shown in FIG. 96 (B) are left final stop symbols as the final stop symbols in the “left” symbol display area 9L. A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the effect symbol, It includes data (determination values) corresponding to pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by combinations of stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3. The temporary stop symbol determination table 167C shown in FIG. 96C is determined by using the temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, and the intermediate temporary stop symbol 2-3. Is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol, depending on which of the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 It includes data (determination values) corresponding to pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 configured by a combination of the middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2, and KZ3-3.

  By determining the temporary stop symbol using the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167C, for example, as shown in FIG. 97, each time according to the number of executions of re-variation (including initial variation) in the pseudo-continuous effect. The effect symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R can be determined as any one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. .

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 includes, for example, a symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. In the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. 98, the effect symbols in the display area of the effect display device 9 during the period from the start of the variation of the effect symbols until the finalized symbol that becomes the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. A plurality of types of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as a variable display operation, an effect display operation in a reach effect, and an effect display operation in a specific effect are stored as symbol variation control patterns. Each symbol variation control pattern is, for example, various types according to variable display of effect symbols such as effect control process timer setting value, effect control process timer determination value, effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and end code. The control data for controlling the rendering operation is included, and the contents of various rendering controls, the switching timing of the rendering control, and the like are set in time series.

  The control pattern table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100 includes, for example, various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. 99 in the period in which the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are controlled. A plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effects control are stored as effect control patterns. Each effect control pattern includes, for example, an effect operation in a big hit game state or a small hit game state such as an effect control process timer set value, an effect control process timer determination value, an effect display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and an end code. The contents of various production controls according to the progress of the production, switching timing of production control, and the like are set in time series.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol and the decorative symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Production symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Based on the reception of the production control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the production symbol (and decoration symbols) is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) ) Is derived and displayed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display processing (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of big hit or small hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a so-called probability change promotion effect, a probability change promotion effect is executed when the probability change promotion effect executing flag indicating execution of the probability change promotion effect is set. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. If the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  Big hit end process (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  102 and 103 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to be off (step S501). Whether it is determined to be out of place is determined by, for example, whether or not a display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. If it is determined to be out of place, it is confirmed whether a command corresponding to a non-reach variation pattern that is a variation pattern that does not include a reach effect is received as a variation pattern command (step S502). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined, for example, based on data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  If it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbol that does not become reach (step S504).

  When it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 101 determines a stop symbol of the effect symbols constituting the reach combination (step S505).

  If it is not determined to be out of place (step S501), the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not it has been determined to be sudden or small hit (step S507). Whether or not it has been determined to be a surprise or small hit is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command (see FIG. 33) is stored in the display result specifying command storage area. In the case where the accuracy is determined to be sudden or small hit, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is one of the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 that are variation patterns for suddenness or small hit. It is determined whether or not there is (step S508). In this embodiment, the variation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 are all variation patterns in which the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is one of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, the process proceeds to step S504, and the effect control CPU 101 finally stops in step S504. An effect design to be a design is determined.

  If it is determined in step S508 that the variation pattern is other than the special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S505.

  If it is not determined for the winning accuracy and the small hit (step S507), the final stop symbol of the effect symbol of the big hit combination is determined (step S511). Specifically, the jackpot symbol is determined such that the effect symbols on the left middle right are aligned with the same symbol.

  After executing any one of steps S504, S505, and S511, or after becoming “N” in the process of step S508, the effect control CPU 101 executes a specific effect setting process (step S516).

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the specific effect setting process. In the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that does not include the specific representation (“slip” or “pseudo-run”) (step S551). ). If the variation pattern does not include the specific effect, the specific effect setting process ends.

  If the variation pattern includes a specific effect, it is determined whether or not the specific effect is “slip” (step S552). If it is a specific effect of “slip”, the effect control CPU 101 selects a specific effect pattern determination table corresponding to the specific effect as a use table (step S553).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the specific effect pattern as one of a plurality of types (step S554). That is, first, the value of the random number SR6-1 for determining the first specific effect pattern is extracted. Then, based on the value of the extracted random number SR6-1, the specific effect pattern is determined as one of the effect patterns of the slide effect by referring to the specific effect pattern determination table selected in the process of step S553.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 updates the previous effect value in the predetermined area of the RAM according to the specific effect pattern determined in the process of step S554 (step S555). By executing the process of step S555, each time the effect operation in the specific effect of “slip” is determined to be one of a plurality of types, data indicating the determined type of effect operation is stored. Then, when the process of step S554 is executed next, control is performed so that the specific effect pattern is not the same as the specific effect pattern in the specific effect of “slip” executed last time.

  If it is determined in step S552 that the specific effect is other than “slip” (ie, “pseudo-continuous”), the process directly proceeds to step S556.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects any temporary stop symbol determination table as a use table based on the specific effect pattern determined in the process of step S554 when the specific effect of “slip” is selected. Further, the value of the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding is extracted. Based on the value of the extracted random number SR3, the temporary stop symbol of the effect symbol is determined by referring to the selected temporary stop symbol determination table (step S556).

  After executing the specific effect setting process in step S516, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect control pattern to be one of a plurality of types (step S517). The effect control CPU 101 includes a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table in accordance with the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command and the specific effect pattern determined in the process of step S516. One of these is selected as the usage pattern.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 executes a notice effect setting process for determining and setting the content of the notice effect (step S518A). The details of the notice effect setting process will be described later (see FIGS. 107 and 108).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern and the content of the notice effect (step S518B). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S519).

  FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 in accordance with the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data are collected. The display control execution data includes, for example, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 9 in addition to the display mode of the effect symbol) (Including other aspects of the screen) Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, displays the effect design in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed on the display screen. Control to display. In addition, the flashing of the light emitter is controlled in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled. Further, the movable member 78 and the blade objects 79a and 79b are controlled in a manner set in the movable member control data.

  The process table shown in FIG. 105 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The process table is prepared according to the contents of each effect control pattern and notice effect. If it is determined to execute the notice effect in the process of step S518A, data corresponding to the notice effect is set, the process table is selected, and it is not determined to execute the notice effect. The process table for which data corresponding to the notice effect is not set is selected.

  FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effects executed in accordance with the contents of the process table. The effect control CPU 101 executes display control according to effect control execution data in the process table. That is, when the time corresponding to the timer value set as the process timer set value has elapsed, according to the next effect control execution data in the process table, the effect display device 9, the light emitter such as LED, the speaker 27, the movable member 78, and By repeating the process of controlling the blades 79a and 79b, an effect in a single change in the effect symbol is realized. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) is set in data (for example, movable member control data) corresponding to a production component that is not controlled during the variation period.

  When the effect control CPU 101 executes the process of step S519, the effect control device (the effect symbol is displayed in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1). Control of an effect display device 9 as an effect part to be variably displayed, various lamps as an effect part, a speaker 27 as an effect part, and a movable member 78 and blades 79a and 79b as effect parts is started. (Step S520). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image (including an effect symbol) corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. Further, a drive signal for operating the movable member 78 is output in accordance with the movable member control data. In addition, according to the movable member control data, a drive signal for operating the blade objects 79a and 79b is output.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S521), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the processing during the effect symbol variation (step S802). (Step S522).

  107 and 108 are flowcharts showing the notice effect setting process in step S518A. In the notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a command corresponding to a non-reach deviation variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern) has been received as a variation pattern command (step S571). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern is received is determined by, for example, data stored in the fluctuation pattern command storage area. If it is determined that a command corresponding to the non-reach shift pattern is received (Y in step S571), the first step up is performed using the first advance setting table for non-reach shift shown in the upper left of FIG. The content (presence / absence, effect mode) of the notice effect is determined (step S572).

  In this embodiment, the step-up notice effect is a notice effect (preliminary notice from the first stage to a plurality of stages) at a predetermined timing in accordance with a predetermined order during one change (variable display) of symbols. This refers to a notice effect that informs the player in stages that there is a possibility of a big hit by changing (developing) one or more times. In this embodiment, the player is notified that the probability of a big hit is higher as the number of times of changing the notice effect increases (the more the notice effect is executed in multiple stages). Note that the step-up notice effect may end without the first notice effect changing.

  Note that the step-up notice effect may be such that the shape and color of one character changes, and the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as seen from the player changes stepwise. If it can be recognized as “step-up notice”, it can be said.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later (see FIG. 126, etc.), the content of the first step-up notice effect is such that characters (human characters) appear in stages at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is directed to go. Detailed contents of the first step-up notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 126 and the like.

  In the first notice setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 109, the notice effect “None”, the effect mode in which only the notice effect A is executed (the development pattern of “A”), and the notice effect A are executed. An effect mode (the development pattern of “A → B”) in which the notice effect B is executed after that, and an effect mode in which the notice effect B is executed after the notice effect A is executed, and then the notice effect C is executed ( “A → B → C” development pattern) and after the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect B, the notice effect C, and the notice effect D are executed in order (“A → B → C → D”). Development pattern), and after the notice effect A is executed, the notice pattern B, the notice effect C, the notice effect D, and the notice effect E are executed in order (an extension pattern “A → B → C → D → E”). ) And the notice effect B and the notice effect C after the notice effect A is executed. Informational display D, the effect is produced that announcement attraction e are executed in the order (development patterns of "A → B → C → D → e"), it is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode. The numbers shown in “Allocation” indicate the number of determination values assigned to each effect mode. The same applies to the other tables (FIGS. 110 to 113).

  In the first notice setting table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 109, “A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”, No determination value is assigned to “A → B → C → D → e” (the number of determination values is 0). This is to prevent the occurrence of the advance notice effect C or higher when the reach does not occur, that is, to determine the occurrence of reach when the effect of the advance notice effect C or higher appears.

  In step S572, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-1 for determining the first step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”... To do.

  In addition, after determining the content of the first step-up notice effect in step S572, the effect control CPU 101 uses the second reach-up notice effect table for non-reach deviation shown in the upper left of FIG. 110 to perform the second step-up notice effect. Is determined (presence / absence, production mode) (step S573).

  In this embodiment, as will be described later (see FIG. 127, FIG. 129, etc.), the content of the second step-up notice effect changes step by step (development, conversion) the background image of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is a production that will let you. Detailed contents of the second step-up notice effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127, 129, and the like.

  110, the notice effect “none”, the effect form in which only the notice effect X is executed (the development pattern of “X”), and the notice effect X are executed. An effect mode (the development pattern of “X → Y”) in which the notice effect Y is executed after that, and an effect mode in which the notice effect Y is executed after the notice effect X is executed, and then the notice effect Z is executed ( “X → Y → Z”), and after the notice effect X is executed, the notice effect Y is executed, and then the notice effect z is executed (the development pattern “X → Y → z”). ) And are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In step S573, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the second step-up notice determination random number SR5-2, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “X”, “X → Y”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  In step S571, when it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach deviation variation pattern is not received (N in step S571), the normal reach CPU 101 receives the command corresponding to the deviation variation pattern. Whether or not (step S574). When it is determined that the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation is received (Y in step S574), the effect control CPU 101 uses the first notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. The contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the first step-up notice effect are determined (step S575).

  In the first notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 109, the notice effect “None”, the effect form (only the development pattern of “A”) executed only for the notice effect A, and the notice effect A are executed. The effect mode in which the notice effect B is executed (the development pattern of “A → B”) and the effect state in which the notice effect B is executed after the notice effect A is executed, and then the notice effect C is executed (“ A development pattern of “A → B → C → D”), and after the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect B, the notice effect C, and the notice effect D are executed in order (the development of “A → B → C → D”). Pattern) and an effect mode in which the notice effect B, the notice effect C, the notice effect D, and the notice effect E are sequentially executed after the notice effect A is executed (the development pattern of “A → B → C → D → E”). After the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect B and the notice An effect mode (an extension pattern of “A → B → C → D → e”) in which the output C, the notice effect D, and the notice effect e are executed in order, and the notice effect B is executed after the notice effect A is executed. However, after the notice effect A is executed, the effect mode in which the notice effect C is temporarily ended without being executed and then the notice effect D is executed (the development pattern of “A → B → one time end → D”). The notice effect B is executed, but the notice effect C is temporarily ended without being executed, and then the notice effect D and the notice effect E are sequentially executed (“A → B → temporarily end → D → E”). ) And the notice effect B is executed after the notice effect A is executed, but the notice effect C is temporarily ended without being executed, and then the notice effect D and the notice effect E are executed in order. Aspect (Development pattern of “A → B → End → D → E”) and notice effect A The notice effect B is executed after being performed, but the notice effect C is temporarily ended without being executed, and then the notice effect D and the notice effect e are sequentially executed (“A → B → end once → D → e ”development pattern). A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In the first advance notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 109, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”, “A → B → C → D → e ”,“ A → B → Temporary End → D ”,“ A → B → Temporary End → D → E ”, and“ A → B → Temporary End → D → e ”are not assigned. The number of values is 0). This is for the purpose of determining the occurrence of super reach when an effect greater than the notice effect D appears.

  In step S575, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the first step-up notice determination random number SR5-1, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”... To do.

  In addition, after determining the content of the first step-up notice effect in step S575, the effect control CPU 101 uses the second reach setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 110 to perform the second step-up notice effect. The contents (presence / absence, production mode) are determined (step S576).

  In the second reach setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 110, the notice effect “None”, the effect mode in which only the notice effect X is executed (the development pattern of “X”), and the notice effect X are executed. From which the notice effect Y is executed (the development pattern “X → Y”), and the notice effect Y is executed after the notice effect X is executed, and then the notice effect Z is executed (“ X → Y → Z ”), and after the notice effect X is executed, the notice effect Y is executed, and then the notice effect z is executed (the development pattern“ X → Y → z ”). And after the notice effect X is executed, the notice effect Y is temporarily ended without being executed, and then the notice effect Z is executed (the development pattern “X → temporarily end → Z”) is set. Has been. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In step S576, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-2 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “X”, “X → Y”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  In step S574, when it is determined that the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation from the normal reach has not been received (N in step S574), the CPU for effect control 101 has received a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation from the super reach. Whether or not (step S577). If it is determined that the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach deviation has been received (Y in step S577), the effect control CPU 101 uses the first notice setting table for super reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. Then, the content (presence / absence, effect mode) of the first step-up notice effect is determined (step S578).

  In the first advance notice setting table for super-reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. 109, an effect mode having the same contents as the first advance notice setting table for out-going normal reach shown in FIG. 109 is set. Each number is assigned a judgment value.

  In step S578, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the first step-up notice determination random number SR5-1, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”... To do.

  Further, after determining the content of the first step-up notice effect in step S578, the effect control CPU 101 uses the second reach-up notice table for super-reaching shown in the lower left of FIG. Contents (presence / absence, production mode) are determined (step S579).

  In the second notice setting table for super-reach deviation shown in the lower left of FIG. 110, the same effect forms as the second notice setting table for normal reach deviation shown in the upper right of FIG. 110 are set. Each number is assigned a judgment value.

  In step S579, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-2 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “X”, “X → Y”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  If it is determined in step S577 that the effect control CPU 101 has not received a command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation from super reach (N in step S577), it is determined that the command corresponding to the big hit fluctuation pattern has been received. Judgment is made and the contents (presence / absence, production mode) of the first step-up notice effect are determined using the jackpot first notice setting table shown in the lower right of FIG. 109 (step S580).

  In the first jackpot setting table for big hits shown in the lower right of FIG. 109, the production mode having the same content as the first notice setting table for normal reach deviation and super reach deviation shown in the upper right and lower left of FIG. 109 is set. A predetermined number of judgment values are assigned to each production mode.

  In step S580, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the first step-up notice determination random number SR5-1, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the first notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the first step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “A”, “A → B”... To do.

  Further, after determining the content of the first step-up notice effect in step S580, the effect control CPU 101 uses the second jackpot second notice setting table shown in the lower right of FIG. 110 to perform the second step-up notice effect. The contents (presence / absence, production mode) are determined (step S581).

  In the second jackpot setting table for big hits shown in the lower right of FIG. 110, the production mode having the same contents as the second notice setting table for normal reach deviation and super reach deviation shown in the upper right and lower left of FIG. 110 is set. A predetermined number of judgment values are assigned to each production mode.

  In step S581, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-2 for determining the second step-up notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the second notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the second step-up notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “X”, “X → Y”...) Assigned to the determination value that matches the random value. To do.

  In this embodiment, the presence / absence of the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) and the effect mode are determined in the same notice setting table (first notice setting table, The second notice setting table) is used. However, the same notice setting table is not used for all types of jackpots, but a notice setting table is used for each of the big hits, probability variable big hits, sudden probability variable big hits and small hits, and the notice setting table corresponding to the big hit type is used. The presence / absence of the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) and the effect mode may be determined. In this case, by changing the distribution of the judgment value for the notice effect in each notice setting table, it is possible to vary the execution ratio of the step-up notice and the appearance ratio of the effect mode according to the type of jackpot. For example, the probability variation big hit is compared to the normal big hit, and a table is provided so that a pattern that continues to be stepped up, such as a production mode of “A → B → C → D → e” and a production mode of “Temporary → Resume”, can be selected. By setting, the interest can be further improved. In addition, by setting the table so that “Simply End → Resurrection” is selected for Sudden Probability Big Hits and Small Hits, for example, “Skip End → Resurrection” is not selected for Small Hits, Even if the game is in a similar or identical manner and the game state is suddenly indistinguishable from the probable big hit and the small win (the game state in which the probable state is indistinguishable), the notice effect is produced. In this mode, it is possible to discriminate whether suddenly a big hit or a small hit has occurred, and the gameability can be improved.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the movable object notice effect using the movable object notice setting table shown in FIG. 111 (step S582). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the change pattern based on the change pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The content (presence / absence, production mode) of the movable object notice effect is determined using the movable object notice setting table, and the content of the movable object notice effect is determined using the movable object notice setting table for big hits in the case of a big hit. .

  In this embodiment, the movable object notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit when the movable member 78 operates in a scheduled manner. That is, the movable object notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that the operating member 78 changes (develops and operates) one or more times stepwise). Detailed contents of the movable object notice effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the movable object advance notice setting table shown in FIG. 111, the advancement effect “none”, the effect mode in which the movable member 78 operates at the first advance notice timing, and the second advance notice timing (a timing different from the first advance notice timing) are movable members. An effect mode in which the movable member 78 operates at the third notice timing (both the first notice timing and the second notice timing) is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In step S582, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-3 for determining the movable object notice, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the movable object notice setting table. Then, based on the notice effect (“none”, “first notice timing”, “second notice timing”, “third notice timing”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value, the moving object notice effect is displayed. Presence / absence and production mode are determined.

  The contents of the moving object notice effect are determined using the same big object moving object notice setting table at the time of big hit, but depending on the type of big hit (probable big hit, normal big hit, sudden probable big hit, small hit) A plurality of movable object notice setting tables may be provided, and the contents of the movable object notice effect may be determined using a table corresponding to the type of jackpot. In this case, by changing the distribution value of each table according to the type of jackpot, the execution ratio of the movable object notice effect and the appearance ratio of the effect mode can be changed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 uses the button notice setting table shown in FIG. 112 to determine the contents (presence / absence, effect form) of the button notice effect (step S583). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the change pattern based on the change pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The contents of the button notice effect (presence / absence, effect form) are determined using the button notice setting table, and the contents of the button notice effect are determined using the button notice setting table for the big hit when the big hit.

  In this embodiment, the button notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, but the possibility of a big hit by displaying a predetermined image on the display screen of the effect display device 9 in response to the pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player. It is an effect to notify that there is. That is, the button notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that changes (develops) one or more times stepwise in accordance with the operation of the operation button 120). Detailed contents of the button notice effect will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the button notice setting table shown in FIG. 112, the notice effect “None”, the effect that the first mail notice effect (the mail notice effect at the first stage of opening the mail) is executed at the early timing, and the first mail at the later time are shown. An effect mode in which a notice effect (e-mail notice effect) is executed, an effect mode in which a second e-mail notice effect (e-mail notification effect in two stages of opening an email) is executed at an early timing, and a second e-mail notice effect at a later time An effect mode in which (mail notice effect) is executed, an effect mode in which a card notice effect (notice effect in which a card appears) is executed at an early timing, and an effect mode in which a card notice effect is executed at a later timing Is set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to each effect mode.

  In step S583, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-4 for determining the button notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the button notice setting table. Then, the notice effect assigned to the determination value that matches the random value (“none”, “early timing in the first mail notice”, “late time in the first mail notice”, “early timing in the second mail notice”, The presence / absence of the button notice effect and the effect mode are determined based on “slow timing in the second mail notice”, “early timing in the card notice”, “late timing in the card notice”).

  In addition, the content of the button notice effect is determined by using the same big hit button notice setting table at the time of big hit, but depending on the type of big hit (probable big hit, normal big hit, sudden probable big hit, small hit) A button notice setting table may be provided, and the contents of the button notice effect may be determined using a table corresponding to the type of jackpot. In this case, depending on the type of jackpot, by changing the distribution value of each table, it is possible to vary the execution ratio of the button notice effect and the appearance ratio of the effect mode.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of a frame (lamp) notice effect using the frame (lamp) notice setting table shown in FIG. 113 (step S584). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The contents (presence / absence, effect mode) of the frame notice effect are determined using the frame notice setting table, and the contents of the frame notice effect are determined using the frame notice setting table for big hits in the case of a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the frame (lamp) notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by lighting the frame lamp 28 with a predetermined lighting pattern. In other words, the frame (lamp) notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that changes (develops) the lighting pattern step by step once or a plurality of times). The specific contents of the frame notice effect will be omitted.

  The frame notice setting table shown in FIG. 113 is provided with a table at the time of loss and a table at the time of a big hit. In each frame notice setting table, a notice effect “none” and a frame notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability of the frame advance notice effect is higher in the case of the big hit than in the case of the loss.

  In step S584, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-5 for frame notice determination, and compares the extracted random number value with the determination value set in the frame notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the frame notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of the mini character notice effect using the mini character notice setting table shown in FIG. 113 (step S585). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the change pattern based on the change pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The content (presence / absence, production mode) of the mini character notice effect is determined using the mini character notice setting table, and the content of the mini character notice effect is determined using the mini character notice setting table for the big hit when the big hit.

  In this embodiment, the mini character notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, but a notification that there is a possibility of a big hit by displaying a mini character (an image of a character with a small size) on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Production. That is, the mini character notice effect is not a notice effect that changes once or a plurality of times (not a notice effect that changes (develops) a mini character step by step one or more times).

  The mini character notice setting table shown in FIG. 113 is provided with a table for a loss and a table for a big hit. In each mini character notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the mini character notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the execution probability of the mini character notice notice effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  In step S585, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-6 for determining the mini character notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the mini character notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the mini character notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  Note that a plurality of types of mini character notice effects may be provided, and when mini character notice execution (mini character appearance) is decided, it may be determined which mini character appears. A character that can appear only at the time of a big hit may be set as the type of mini character. In addition to the jackpot notice, the mini character is a notice that suggests whether or not it will be a big hit with probability fluctuation at the time of the jackpot, a notice that suggests whether or not the fluctuation will reach, a notice that suggests whether to become super reach, It is equipped with multiple character mini-notices with different targets to be notified, such as a notice suggesting whether a pseudo-ream or a slide effect will occur, and each system is selected based on the result of the big hit determination and the contents of the fluctuation pattern You may do it.

  In this embodiment, the distribution value in the table is changed between the case of a loss and the case of big hit. However, in the case of big hit, the distribution value used in each of the probability variation big hit, normal big hit, sudden hit, and small hit. Different mini character notice determination tables may be provided, and the appearance and type of mini characters may be selected based on these tables. In this case, when a plurality of mini-characters are provided, a table may be provided for each system, and the appearance of each mini-character of the plurality of systems may be selected.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of the blade object notice effect using the blade object notice setting table shown in FIG. 113 (step S586). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The content (presence / absence, production mode) of the wing mono notice effect is determined using the wing mono notice setting table, and the content of the wing mono notice effect is determined using the bonanza pre-announcement setting table for a big hit. .

  In this embodiment, the wing mono notice effect is not a step-up notice effect but an effect that notifies that there is a possibility of a big hit by operating the wing items 79a and 79b at a predetermined timing. That is, the blade mono notice effect is not a notice effect in which the feather items 79a and 79b are operated once or a plurality of times. The specific contents of the feather mono notice effect will be omitted.

  The blade mono notice setting table shown in FIG. 113 is provided with a table at the time of disconnection and a table at the time of a big hit. In each blade item preview setting table, a notification effect “none” and a blade item notification effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. Note that the determination value is set so that the probability of execution of the wing mono advance notice effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  In step S586, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-7 for determining the blade object notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the blade object notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the feather mono notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execution”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 uses the other system liquid crystal notice setting table shown in FIG. 113 to determine whether or not there is another system liquid crystal notice effect (a notice effect of a different system from other notices such as step-up notice and button notice). Determination is made (step S587). Specifically, it is determined whether it is out of hit or big hit based on the contents of the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command or the display result (big hit judgment result) based on the display result designation command. The other system liquid crystal notice setting table is used to determine the content (presence / absence, production mode) of the other system liquid crystal notice setting. When the big hit, the other system liquid crystal notice setting table for the big hit is used. Determine the content.

  In this embodiment, the other-system liquid crystal notice effect is not a step-up notice effect, but a predetermined image (an image of a character appearing in a step-up notice or an image displayed as a button notice, on the display screen of the effect display device 9). This is an effect of notifying that there is a possibility of a big hit by displaying an image different from the image of the mini character) at a predetermined timing. That is, the other system liquid crystal notice effect is not a notice effect that changes a predetermined image once or a plurality of times on the display screen of the effect display device 9. The specific contents of the other system liquid crystal notice effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133 and the like.

  The other-system liquid crystal notice setting table shown in FIG. 113 is provided with a table at the time of disconnection and a table at the time of a big hit. In each other system liquid crystal notice setting table, the notice effect “none” and the other system liquid crystal notice effect “execution” are set. A predetermined number of determination values are assigned to “none” and “execution”, respectively. It should be noted that the determination value is set so that the probability of execution of the other system liquid crystal notice announcement effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss.

  In step S587, the effect control CPU 101 extracts the value of the random number SR5-7 for determining the other system liquid crystal notice, and compares the extracted random value with the determination value set in the other system liquid crystal notice setting table. Then, the presence / absence of the other system liquid crystal notice effect is determined based on the notice effect (“none”, “execute”) assigned to the determination value that matches the random value.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the separately determined first step-up notice effect and second step-up notice effect can be combined (step S588).

  Specifically, combinations shown in FIGS. 114 to 117 are conceivable as combinations of the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect. 114 to 117 are explanatory diagrams showing the combination of the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice.

  In this embodiment, as the first step-up notice effect effect form (development pattern), an effect form in which the notice effect changes twice (development in two stages) (an effect aspect of “A → B → C” or more) is executed. When this is done, the presentation mode ("X-> Y-> Z" or "X-> Y-> z") in which the previous-stage announcement changes twice (development in two stages) is performed as the second-step-up announcement production mode (development pattern). Is not executed. That is, an effect mode of “A → B → C” or more in the first step-up notice effect and an effect form “X → Y → Z” or “X → Y → z” in the second step-up notice effect are executed simultaneously. Is prohibited. This is because, in this embodiment, when “X → Y → Z” or “X → Y → z” is executed as an effect mode of the second step-up notice effect, for example, (3-8) in FIG. As shown in (3-11) of FIG. 133, since the background image representing the second step-up notice effect is enlarged to the entire area of the display screen of the effect display device 9, this is displayed. At this time, the notice effect “C” of the first step-up notice effect executed at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 cannot be executed (a character corresponding to the notice effect C may appear on the display screen). It is not possible. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 115, when the production mode of “A → B → C” or more is determined as the production mode of the first step-up notice effect, “X → The production mode of “Y → Z” or “X → Y → z” must not be determined.

  Therefore, the first aspect of the advance notice of the step-up notice is “A → B → C” or higher (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”). ”“ A → B → C → D → e ”), and when the effect modes“ X → Y → Z ”and“ X → Y → z ”are determined as the effect modes of the second step-up notice effect, As shown in FIG. 115, it is determined that the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect cannot be combined (N in step S588). And the process which changes (rewrites) the production | generation aspect of 2nd step-up notice effect to "X-> Y" which lowered step up by one step, for example is performed (step S589). When the production mode of “X → Y → Z” or “X → Y → z” is determined as the production mode of the second step-up notice effect, the production mode of the first step-up notice effect is, for example, step You may make it perform the process which changes (rewrites) to the production | generation aspect "A-> B" which lowered up one step or more.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid duplication of two step-up notice effects executed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and notice by executing two notice effects simultaneously on the display screen. Display complexity can be avoided.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as an effect mode of the first step-up notice effect, “A → B → temporary termination → D”, “A → B → temporary termination → D → E”, “A → B → temporary termination”. The production mode of “→ D → e” can be determined. In such an effect mode, after the notice effect B is executed, it is presumed that the step-up notice is once ended, and thereafter, the notice effect D is executed so that the step-up notice is restored. Here, after the step-up notice is presumed to end, the notice effect D is executed when the notice effect Z or z of the second step-up notice effect is executed, and the step-up notice is restored. It is effective to show it. By linking such a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect, it is possible to effectively raise the player's expectation. Therefore, as the production mode of the first step-up notice effect, “A → B → temporary termination → D”, “A → B → temporary termination → D → E”, “A → B → temporary termination → D → e”. When the production mode is determined, as shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, in step S588, the production mode of the second step-up notice production (“X → Y → Z”, “X → Y → z”) and Are determined to be possible, and it is determined that the combination with the production mode of the second step-up notice effect (“none”, “X only”, “X → Y”) is impossible. When it is determined that the combination is impossible (N in step S588), the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect is changed to, for example, “X → Y → Z” in which the step-up is increased by one or more steps (rewrite). ) The process is executed (step S589). Even if it is determined that the combination is impossible, other notice effect (movable object notice effect (second notice timing or third notice timing), button notice (late timing) or other system liquid crystal notice) If any of the above is confirmed and another notice effect is executed, the process of changing the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect is not executed. After pretending that the step-up notice was once finished, another notice effect (movable object notice effect (second notice timing or third notice timing), button notice (late timing) or other system liquid crystal notice) was executed. This is for the purpose of causing the notice effect D to be executed and to make it appear that the step-up notice has been restored.

  Further, in this embodiment, an effect mode of “X → temporarily end → Z” can be determined as the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect. In such an effect mode, after the notice effect X is executed, it is presumed that the step-up notice has once ended, and then the notice effect Z is executed to make it appear that the step-up notice has been restored. Here, after making it seem that the step-up notice has once ended, the notice effect D is executed when the notice effect B of the first step-up notice effect is executed, and the step-up notice is revived. Is effective. By linking such a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect, it is possible to effectively raise the player's expectation. Therefore, when an effect mode of “X → temporarily end → Z” is determined as the effect mode of the second step-up notice effect, as shown in FIG. 117, the effect of the first step-up notice effect is shown in step S588. It is determined that only the combination of “A → B” is possible as an aspect, and it is determined that the combination with other effects is impossible. Although not shown in FIG. 117, when the production mode of “X → temporarily end → Z” is determined as the production mode of the second step-up announcement effect, the production mode of the first step-up announcement production is “ It is determined that a combination with an effect mode (such as “A → B → temporarily end → D”) that is once finished is also impossible. When it is determined that the combination is impossible (N in step S588), a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect to “A → B” is executed (step S589).

  In this embodiment, when an effect mode in which the notice effect changes twice or more (develops two or more stages) is executed as the effect mode (development pattern) of the first step-up notice effect, that is, “A → When a production mode of “B → C” or more is executed, reach (normal reach, super reach) is always generated. Therefore, in the first notice setting table for non-reach deviation in the upper left of FIG. 109, the determination value is not assigned to the production mode of “A → B → C” or more. For this reason, when reach does not occur (when a non-reach shift pattern command is received), the reach confirmation effect mode (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D ”,“ A → B → C → D → E ”,“ A → B → C → D → e ”) are not always determined.

  In the first notice setting table shown in the upper left of FIG. 109, the reach confirmation effect modes (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”, “A” → B → C → D → e ”)), it is impossible to combine the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect in step S588 (reaching confirmation effect). It is determined that the execution of the aspect is impossible. In this case, in step S589, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect to an effect mode (for example, “A → B”) that is not reach determination is executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an effect mode in which the notice effect changes three times or more (development of three or more stages) is executed as the effect mode (development pattern) of the first step-up notice effect, that is, “A → Super-reach always occurs when a production mode of “B → C → D” or more or “A → B → end once → D” or more is executed. Accordingly, in the first notice setting table for deviation from the normal reach in the upper right of FIG. 109, determination values are assigned to the production modes of “A → B → C → D” and “A → B → Temporary End → D” or more. Not. For this reason, when super reach does not occur (when a normal reach deviation variation pattern command is received), the reach confirmation effect mode (“A → B → C → D”, “ "A-> B-> C-> D-> E" "A-> B-> C-> D-> e" "A-> B-> End once-> D" "A-> B-> End once-> D-> E" "A-> B-> End once → D → e ”) is not always determined.

  In the first notice setting table shown in the upper right of FIG. 109, the super-reach determination effect modes (“A → B → C → D”, “A → B → C → D → E”, “A → B → C → D”). → e ”,“ A → B → temporary → D ”,“ A → B → temporary termination → D → E ”,“ A → B → temporary termination → D → e ”)). In step S588, it is determined that the combination of the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect cannot be performed (the execution of the super reach determination effect mode is impossible). In this case, in step S589, a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the first step-up notice effect to an effect mode (for example, “A → B → C”) that is not super reach determination is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 combines a step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) and a button notice effect, and a step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, first It is determined whether or not the combination of the two-step-up notice effect) and the other system liquid crystal notice effect is possible (step S590). In this embodiment, the first step-up notice effect, the second step-up notice effect, the button notice effect, and the other system liquid crystal notice effect are all executed on the liquid crystal screen of the effect display device 9, so the step up This is because the notice effect and other notice effects (button notice effect, other system liquid crystal notice effect) may not be executed at the same time.

  As shown in FIGS. 114 to 117, the button notice effect (mail notice effect, card notice effect) executed at an early timing is combined with an arbitrary effect mode in the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect. Is possible. On the other hand, button notice effects (mail notice effects, card notice effects) executed at a later timing can be combined with any effect mode for the first step-up notice effect, but for the second step-up notice effect, “ The combination of “X → Y → Z” and “X → Y → z” is not possible. Since the timing at which the button notice effect is executed and the timing at which the notice effect Z or z in which the notice image is displayed in full screen are overlapped, the button notice effect and the notice effect Z or z are executed simultaneously. It is because it is not possible. When it is determined that the combination is impossible (N in step S590), a process of changing (rewriting) the effect mode of the button notice effect at the later timing to, for example, the effect mode of the button notice effect at the earlier timing is executed ( Step S591).

  As shown in FIGS. 114 to 117, the other-system liquid crystal notice effect is an effect mode (“A → B → C”, “A → B → C →”) for executing the notice effect C for the first step-up notice effect. D ”,“ A → B → C → D → E ”,“ A → B → C → D → e ”) is impossible, and for the second step-up notice effect, the notice effect Z or z is executed. Combination with the production mode (“X → Y → Z”, “X → Y → z”, “X → temporarily end → Z”) is impossible. The timing at which the other system advance notice effect (see FIGS. 139 (5-5) and (5-6)) in which the advance notice image is displayed on the full screen is overlapped with the timing at which the advance notice effect C is executed, and the advance notice image is displayed. Since the timing at which the other-line notice announcement effect for full screen display is executed and the timing at which the notice image Z or z for which full-screen display is executed are duplicated, the other-system liquid crystal notice effect and the notice effect C This is because the other system liquid crystal notice effect and the notice effect Z or z cannot be executed simultaneously. If it is determined that the combination is impossible (N in step S590), for example, the effect is changed so that the effect mode of the other-system liquid crystal notice effect is not executed, or the notice effect C and the notice effects Z and z are not executed. A (rewrite) process is executed (step S591).

  Since the movable object notice effect is executed by moving the movable member 78 around the effect display device 9 in the rain, the step-up executed on the liquid crystal screen of the effect display device 9 is performed at any timing. It can be executed simultaneously with the notice effect. Therefore, the movable object notice effect can be combined with any effect form in the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect.

  In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, after pretending that the step-up notice is once finished, either the movable object notice, the button notice (slow timing mail notice or card notice), or another system liquid crystal notice is provided. It is effective to make it appear as if the notice effect D is executed and the step-up notice is revived in response to the execution of. By linking such a first step-up notice effect and other notice effects (movable object notice effect, button notice effect, other system liquid crystal notice effect), it is possible to effectively raise the player's expectation.

  In such a case, as an effect form of the first step-up notice effect, an effect form in which the step-up notice is temporarily ended (that is, “A → B → temporary end → D”, “A → B → temporary end → D → E”). ”,“ A → B → End once → D → e ”), at least the second step-up notice effect Z, z, the movable object notice effect (second notice timing or The third notice timing), the button notice effect (late timing), or another system liquid crystal notice effect needs to be determined. In the process of step S589, an effect mode in which the step-up notice is temporarily ended is determined as the first step-up notice effect, and the notice effect Z, z of the second step-up notice effect, the movable object notice effect (second notice timing). Or, when any of the button notice effect (slow timing) or the other system liquid crystal notice effect is not determined, the effect form of the second step-up notice effect is changed to, for example, “X → Y → Z”. However, it may be forcibly executed in any of the movable object notice effect (second notice timing or third notice timing), the button notice effect (late timing), or the other system liquid crystal notice effect. .

  The presence / absence of the notice effect and the effect aspect determined as described above are stored (set) in a predetermined storage area (notice effect storage area) of the ROM in the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, when the step-up notice effect once finished is restored, the notice effect D which is one notice effect of the step-up notice is executed. It is not always necessary to execute the notice effect D, and other different notice effects may be executed. That is, at the timing after the end of the step-up notice effect (the timing at which the step-up notice effect is recognized without being executed), other notice effects (button notice effect, movable object notice effect, other system) A liquid crystal notice effect) may be generated. According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the big hit to the discouraged player who recognizes that the step-up notice effect has once ended and recognizes that the possibility of the big hit is low. In addition to being able to improve, it is possible to maintain a further expectation by generating a new notice effect afterwards. Note that it is not necessary to execute 100% of the new notice effect after the other notice effect is executed, and it may be executed at a predetermined rate. In that case, a new effect is executed by using a table in which the appearance rate at which a new notice effect appears is higher than when the big hit is determined to be out of place. Since the player can recognize that the possibility of a big hit is increased, the interest can be further improved.

  FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation in-process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S842). When the process timer times out (step S843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table in the process timer (step S844). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data, and movable member control data set next (step S845).

  Next, in step S845, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect) is executed according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data or the like). Is confirmed (step S846). When the step-up notice effect is being executed (Y in step S846), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is the switching timing of the step-up notice effect based on the contents of the process data (step S847). If it is the step-up notice effect switching timing (Y in step S847), the effect control CPU 101 follows the contents of the process data (particularly, display control execution data including the notice effect, lamp control execution data, and movable member control data). The step-up notice effect is switched (changed, developed) (step S848).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operation button 120 can be operated (button effective period) (step S849). The operation button 120 is effective when the button notice effect is being executed. When the button is valid (Y in step S849), the effect control CPU 101 executes a process of detecting whether or not the operation button 120 is turned on (pressed) (step S850). The on state of the operation button 120 is detected by inputting an on signal from the operation button 120. When the effect control CPU 101 detects that the operation button 120 is turned on (Y in step S850), the effect control CPU 101 executes an effect corresponding to the operation button 120 being turned on in the set button notice effect (email notice or card notice) (step S850). S851).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether it is the execution timing of the movable object notice effect based on the contents of the process data (movable member control data or the like) (step S852). If it is the execution timing of the movable object notice effect (Y in step S852), the movable member notice effect is executed by operating the movable member 78 in accordance with the contents of the process data (particularly, movable member control data) (step S853).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the execution timing of other notice effects (frame notice effect, mini-character notice effect, feather mono notice effect, other system liquid crystal notice effect) based on the contents of the process data ( Step S854). If it is the execution timing of the other notice effect (Y in step S854), the other notice effect is executed according to the contents of the process data (step S855). That is, the frame lamp 28 is turned on in a predetermined lighting pattern, a mini character image is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 at a predetermined timing, the blades 79a and 79b are operated, the screen of the effect display device 9 In addition, an image (an image of another system) different from an image used for other effects is displayed.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S856), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S858). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S857), the process proceeds to step S848. Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, if the design confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control to stop fluctuation.For example, a fluctuation pattern command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards is received. Even in such a case, it is possible to end the variation of the effect symbol when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol ends).

  In the case where the processes of steps S841 to S845 are executed based on the variation pattern including the “pseudo-continuous” effect, as described above, the effect display device 9 is configured to execute a plurality of effects of pseudo-change of the effect symbol. Display control is executed. In other words, the effect control data indicating the effect of the pseudo-continuous is also set in the process table corresponding to the pseudo-continuous variation pattern.

  Next, the execution timing (notification timing) of various notice effects will be described. FIG. 119 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of various notice effects. As shown in FIG. 119, the other-system liquid crystal notice, the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice, the mail notice (a kind of button notice), the card notice (a kind of button notice) and the mini character notice are displayed on the effect display device 9. Since this is a notice using an image displayed on the screen, these notices are called liquid crystal notices.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the first step-up notice is a notice that the step-up is performed in the order of step (A) to step (B), step (C), step (D), and step (E) (“A → B → C → D → E ”) or an advance notice (“ A → B → C → D ”) from step (A) to step (B), step (C), step (D), step (e) in this order. → e ”). Here, step (A) shows the stage (period) in which the notice effect A is being executed, step (B) shows the stage (period) in which the notice effect B is being executed, and step (C) is the notice effect. Step (D) indicates a stage (period) in which the notice effect D is executed, and step (E) indicates a stage (period) in which the notice effect E is executed. Step (e) shows the stage (period) in which the notice effect e is being executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the second step-up notice is a notice that “step-up from step (X) to step (Y) and step-up from step (Y) to step (Z)” (“X → Y → Z "), or a notice (" X → Y → z ") that steps up from step (X) to step (Y) and steps up from step (Y) to step (z). Here, step (X) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect X is being executed, step (Y) indicates the stage (period) in which the notice effect Y is being executed, and step (Z) is the notice effect. The stage (period) in which Z is executed is shown, and step (z) shows the stage (period) in which the notice effect z is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 119, among the plurality of notice effects, the mini character notice effect and the frame notice effect (frame flash) are the notice effects that can be executed simultaneously with the start of the change of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In addition, the first step-up notice effect, the second step-up notice effect, the e-mail notice effect, the card notice effect, the mini character notice effect, the feather object notice effect, the movable object notice effect, and the frame notice effect, the variation of the effect design changes rapidly. It is considered as a notice effect that can be executed from the time of transition to.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect differ in the timing at which the notice effect changes (that is, the switching timing or the development timing). Specifically, when the first step-up notice effect is executed and the second step-up notice effect is executed, step (A) first changes to step (B), and then step (X). Changes to step (Y). When step (B) in the first step-up notice changes to step (C), step (Y) in the second step-up notice does not change to step (Z) or (z) (“A → B → C 115, it does not develop to “X → Y → Z or z” as shown in FIG. 115: see steps S588 and S589). When the first step-up notice changes (develops) up to step (C), reach (normal reach, super reach) is determined.

  On the other hand, when step (B) in the first step-up notice does not change to step (C), step (Y) in the second step-up notice can change to step (Z) or (z). In this case, step (Y) changes to step (Z) or (z) after the player can recognize that step (B) has not changed to step (C). That is, step (Y) changes to step (Z) or (z) after the time point when step (B) does not change to step (C) and the step-up notice is recognized to have ended.

  When the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are linked so that the first step-up notice is restored after the first step-up notice is finished, the second step-up notice step (Z) or (z) is used. In response to the change, step (D) in the first step-up notice is executed. With such a configuration, the player's expectations can be met effectively.

  As shown in FIG. 119, in the final step (Z) or (z) in the second step-up notice, that is, the notice effect (Z) or (z), the left symbol (first stop symbol that stops first) stops. Exit before. On the other hand, the step (C) in the first step-up notice, that is, the notice effect (C) is continued even after the left symbol is stopped, and the step (D), step S (E) or (e), that is, the notice effect (D). ) And the notice effect (E) or (e) can be executed even after the left symbol stops. According to such a configuration, after the left symbol is stopped, the step-up notice effect can be reduced (to one), and the player can be focused on the stop symbol (right symbol, middle symbol) of the effect symbol. it can.

  In the example shown in FIG. 119, the mail notice notifies the player that the mail has been received, prompts the player to operate the operation button 120, and opens the mail in accordance with the operation of the operation button 120 of the player. The contents of the mail are notified, and the possibility of big hit is recognized according to the contents of the mail. It should be noted that in the e-mail notice, “E-mail 2nd stage” is an effect of opening the e-mail in accordance with the second operation button 120 operation by the player and notifying the contents of the e-mail. In the case of “2 levels of mail”, the possibility of a big hit is higher than that of “1 level of mail”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 119, the card notice displays the card, prompts the player to operate the operation button 120, and releases the card in response to the operation of the player's operation button 120 (that is, flips over). The content written on the card is notified, and the possibility of a big hit is recognized according to the content.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 119, the mini character notice indicates that there is a possibility of a big hit by causing the mini character to appear on the screen of the effect display device 9 (for example, skipping butterflies) at the start of the change of the effect symbol. To recognize.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 119, the wing mono notice causes the player to recognize that there is a possibility of a big hit by operating the wing mono 79a and 79b when the effect design fluctuates at high speed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 119, the movable object notification is performed by operating the movable member 78 at the time (first notification timing) when the change in the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation or in step (B) in the first step-up notification. After the execution, the movable member 78 is operated at the time (second notice timing) before step (D) is executed, or any of the first notice timing and the second notice timing (third notice timing) However, by operating the movable member 78, the player is made aware that there is a possibility of a big hit. In this embodiment, when the movable member 78 is operated at the second notice timing than the first notice timing and at the third notice timing than the second notice timing, the possibility of a big hit is increased. Here, after it appears that the first step-up notice has ended in step (B), the movable member 78 is operated at the second timing to execute the movable object notice, and then the step (D in the first step-up notice) ) Can be made to appear as if the first step-up notice has been restored.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 119, the frame advance notice causes the player to recognize that there is a possibility of a big hit by turning on the frame lamp 28 with a predetermined lighting pattern at the start of the change of the effect symbol.

  In the example shown in FIG. 119, the other-system liquid crystal notice is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 at the time point after the execution of step (B) in the first step-up notice but before the execution of step (D). By displaying a predetermined image (an image different from an image displayed in another liquid crystal notice), the player is made aware that there is a possibility of a big hit. In this case, after the first step-up notice is presumed to have ended in step (B), the other-system liquid crystal notice is executed, and then step (D) in the first step-up notice is executed, thereby causing the first step. It will be possible to appear as if the advance notice has been revived.

  FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern (notice pattern) that develops from step (Y) to step (Z) or (z) in the second step-up notice effect. As shown in FIG. 120, in the second step-up notice, step (X) is executed, and when step (Y) is executed, a suggestive effect that suggests the end of the second step-up notice is executed. In addition, since the suggestion effect has a function of leaving a reverberation of the effect of the executed step (Y), the suggestion effect is also referred to as a reverberation display. In addition, the suggestion effect in this embodiment is an effect such that, as shown in, for example, FIG. 127 (2-4), a beetle that is trapped in a tree is hidden in a tree (in a leaf).

  Here, in the second step-up notice, when the step (Y) changes to the step (Z), the step changes to the step (Z) as soon as the step (Y) ends, and the suggestive effect is not executed. On the other hand, in the second step-up notice, when the step (Y) changes to the step (z), the step changes to the step (z) after the lapse of a predetermined period from the end of the step (Y), and the suggested effect is the predetermined period. Executed.

  As described above, in the second step-up notice, when the process changes to step (Y), the suggestion effect is executed after the end of step (Y) and then the second step-up notice is finished, and step (Y) There are a pattern in which the step (Z) is executed without executing the suggestion effect after the end, and a pattern in which the suggestion effect is executed for a predetermined period after the end of the step (Y) and then the step (z) is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make an interest about whether or not the next notice effect (step) continues after execution of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

  FIG. 121 is a timing diagram showing a first modification of the execution timing of various notice effects. 121 differs from the content shown in FIG. 119 in that a button notice (e-mail notice, card notice) of another system different from the step-up notice (first step-up notice, second step-up notice) is provided. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 121, also in the mail notice of other systems, similar to the mail notice described above, it is notified that the mail has been received, prompts the operation button 120 to be operated (ON), and responds to the operation of the operation button 120. Open the mail and notify the contents of the mail. However, the timing at which the other-system mail notice is executed is the time before step (B) in the first step-up notice ends. By executing the e-mail notice at such timing, it is presumed that the first step-up notice has ended in step (B), and then the other-system e-mail notice is executed, and then the first step-up notice step ( By executing D), it is possible to make the first step-up notice appear to have been restored. Further, in the mail notice of another system, the button valid period during which the operation of the operation button 120 is valid is a period including the execution period of the notice effect (notice effect B) executed before the button notice effect is executed. Therefore, the player can operate the operation button 120 at his / her favorite timing, and the motivation to participate in the game can be increased.

  Also, in the card notice of other systems, similar to the card notice described above, the card is displayed, the operation button 120 is operated (ON), the card is released according to the operation button 120 operation, and the card is written on the card. Announce the contents. However, the timing at which the other-system card notice is executed is the time before step (B) in the first step-up notice ends. By executing the card notice at such timing, it is presumed that the first step-up notice has ended in step (B), then the card notice of another system is executed, and then the step ( By executing D), it is possible to make the first step-up notice appear to have been restored. Furthermore, in the card notice of another system, the button valid period during which the operation of the operation button 120 is effective is a period including the execution period of the notice effect (notice effect B) that was executed before the button notice effect was executed. Therefore, the player can operate the operation button 120 at his / her favorite timing, and the motivation to participate in the game can be increased.

  FIG. 122 is a timing diagram showing a second modification of the execution timing of various notice effects. 122 differs from the content shown in FIG. 121 in that there is a button notice (e-mail notice, card notice) of another system different from the step-up notice (first step-up notice, second step-up notice), etc. This is that the button valid period in the system button notice spans step (B) and step (C) in the first step-up notice.

  Specifically, step (B) in the first step-up notice is executed, and the timing at which the player cannot yet recognize whether step (C) is executed (in the example shown in FIG. 122, in step (C) At the timing before a short time has elapsed since the start of the execution period, the notification of the mail reception or the display of the card is performed to start the mail notice or the card notice. In this embodiment, the operation of the operation button 120 is validated from the time when the notification of mail reception or the display of the card is performed in the email notice or the card notice, and the button valid period starts from that point. Further, the timing at which the player can recognize that step (C) in the first step-up notice is not executed (in the example shown in FIG. 122, the time after a short time has elapsed since the start of the execution period of step (C). Thereafter, the notification of the content of the mail or the notification of the content written on the card is terminated. When the notification of the contents of the mail or the notification of the contents written on the card is ended, the button valid period is ended.

  In this way, the button valid period of the button advance notice is determined based on the timing at which the player cannot recognize whether step (C) is executed in the first step-up notice (first recognition timing) and the player step (C). When the player operates the operation button 120 at the first recognition timing by setting a period including both timings at which it is possible to recognize that is not executed (second recognition timing), an early step (C ) Can be recognized, and when the operation button 120 is operated at the second recognition timing, a sense of expectation can be given again depending on whether or not the button notice is executed. Interest can be improved.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122, when the player presses the operation button 120 at a timing at which the player cannot yet recognize whether or not the step (C) is executed, the mail is opened or the card at that time. To release. Therefore, the player steps in an early stage (before step (C) is executed) based on the contents of the opened mail and the contents of the opened card (whether or not the process proceeds to step (C)). Whether or not it changes to (C) can be recognized. In addition, as shown in FIG. 122, when the player presses the operation button 120 after the timing at which the player can recognize that the step (C) is not executed, the mail is opened or the card is opened at that time. Do. Therefore, even if the player does not change to step (C), the player is based on the contents of the opened mail and the contents of the opened card (whether there is a chance of winning or will develop into super reach) It is possible to recognize whether or not a big hit opportunity or development to super reach will be performed, and to give the player a sense of expectation again.

  FIG. 123 is a timing diagram showing a third modification of the execution timing of various notice effects. In the example shown in FIG. 123, in the final step (Z) or (z) in the second step-up notice, that is, the notice effect (Z) or (z), the left symbol (first stop symbol that stops first) is stopped. It ends before the right symbol (second stop symbol that stops second) stops later. On the other hand, the step (C) in the first step-up notice, that is, the notice effect (C) is continued even after the right symbol is stopped, and the step (D), step (E) or (e), that is, the notice effect (D). And the notice effect (E) or (e) can be executed even after the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and the reach occurs. According to such a configuration, after the middle symbol is stopped, the step-up notice effect can be reduced (one), and the player can be made to pay attention to the stop symbol (middle symbol) of the effect symbol.

  FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S870). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S877. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S876. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect is not yet executed. Without execution, the process proceeds to step S877.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 has set a confirmation command reception flag indicating that an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for instructing to stop changing the effect symbol is received. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step S871). If the confirmation command reception flag is set, control is performed to stop and display the determined stop symbol (outgoing symbol, small hit symbol or big hit symbol) (step S872).

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the effect symbol in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, but the variable time timer has timed out. Based on that, the effect design may be stopped and displayed.

  When the small hit symbol or the big hit display symbol is not displayed in the process of step S872 (that is, when the off-beat symbol is displayed), the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to the variation pattern command reception waiting process. The value is updated according to (Step S800) (Step S874).

  When the small win symbol or the big win symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S872, the effect control CPU 101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S876) and indicates that the big hit start specifying command has been received. Whether the command reception flag (big hit start 1 designation command reception flag or big hit start 2 designation command reception flag) or the small hit / surprise start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / surprise start designation command has been received is set Confirmation is made (step S877). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / surprise start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S878), and a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect. Is selected (step S879).

  The effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag when the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / coincidence start designation command reception flag is set. Also, in the processing of step S879, the effect control CPU 101 is determined to be a normal big hit or a probable big hit (specifically, when receiving a display result 2 designation command or a display result 3 designation command: FIG. 36), when the process table corresponding to the “15-time open game start notification” shown in FIG. 79 is selected and determined to be a small hit or a sudden big hit (specifically, display result 4 designation) When the command or the display result 5 designation command is received (see FIG. 33), the process table corresponding to the “twice-opening game start notification (common in rush / small hit)” shown in FIG. 79 is selected. Then, the process timer is started by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S880), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control) According to the data 1) of the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect part, various lamps as the effect part, the speaker 27 as the effect part, and the movable member 78 and the blades 79a and 79b as the effect parts) Control is executed (step S881). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S882).

  Next, specific examples of various notice effects will be described.

  125 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of each notice effect in the first step-up notice and the contents of each notice effect in the second step-up notice. The first step notice (right step-up notice) includes five notice effects (notice effect A, notice effect B, notice effect C, notice effect D, and notice effect E). In FIG. 125, illustration of the notice effect e is omitted. As shown in FIG. 125, as a notice effect A, an effect is performed in which a human character A appears from the right side of the screen in the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen. As the notice effect B, an effect in which a human character B appears from the right side of the screen in the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen is performed. As the notice effect C, an effect in which a human character C appears from the right side of the screen in the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and leaves to the left side of the screen is performed. As the notice effect D, the characters A, B, and C appear simultaneously from the left side of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and stop at the center of the screen. As the notice effect E, an effect in which a large human character D appears from the right side of the screen where the characters A, B, and C are gathered in the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed.

  The second step notice (left step-up notice) includes three notice effects (notice effect X, notice effect Y, and notice effect Z). In FIG. 125, the notice effect z is not shown. As shown in FIG. 125, as the notice effect X, an effect in which a beetle character flies from the right side of the screen in the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. As the notice effect Y, an effect in which the beetle character stays on the tree in the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. As the notice effect Z, there is an effect that as the background expands to the entire area of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the spirit expands and the beetle character expands.

  Next, a specific example of the first step-up notice will be described as the first notice effect. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the first step-up notice as the first notice effect. The first step-up notice can execute up to five notice effects as described above. As shown in FIG. 126, a background image of the tree 200 is displayed on the background of the display screen of the effect display device 9. In the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, when the start condition is satisfied from the state in which the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 126 (1-1)), the variation of all effect symbols is started. (1-2) When the design symbol changes to a high-speed variation and the start timing of the first step-up notice is reached, a notice effect A (step ( A)), the character A210 appears from the right side of the screen (1-2) and goes to the left side of the screen. Thereafter, when the change timing of a predetermined step comes, the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen (1-3) as the notice effect B (step (B)) in the first step-up notice, and goes to the left side of the screen. For example, in steps S572, S575, S578, and S580 of FIG. 107, if it is determined that the first step-up notice only causes the notice effect A to appear, the notice is given even if the timing of the notice effect B appears. Production B will not appear. At the subsequent predetermined step change timing, the character C212 appears from the right side of the screen (1-4) as the notice effect C (step (C)) in the first step-up notice, and goes to the left side of the screen. Since the character C212 is set so as not to appear in the case of non-reach (see FIG. 109), it is determined that reach will occur at this point. Further, after the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, the character A 210, the character B 211, and the character C 212 simultaneously appear from the left of the screen as the notice effect D (step (D)) in the first step-up notice (1-5). , It stops in the center of the screen. Characters A, B, and C are set so that they do not appear when they are out of normal reach (notice effect D is not executed) (see FIG. 109). Is fixed. Thereafter, after the right symbol (“7”) stops and reach occurs, a large human character D213 appears from the left side of the screen as the notice effect E (step (E)) in the first step-up notice (1-6). ), The characters are gathered in the center, and the display of the characters gathered in the center disappears in order to execute a predetermined reach state effect thereafter.

  Next, a specific example of the second step-up notice will be described as the second notice effect. 127 to 129 are explanatory diagrams illustrating a specific example of the second step-up notice as the second notice effect. As described above, the second step-up notice can execute up to three notice effects. As shown in FIGS. 127 to 129, when the start condition is satisfied from the state in which the left, middle and right production symbols are stopped in the left, middle and right symbol display areas 9L, 9C and 9R (FIG. 127 (2-1)). When all the design symbols change (2-2), the design symbol changes to a high-speed change, and when the second step-up notice starts, in the background of the effect display device 9, the second step-up notice As the notice effect X (step (X)), the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen (2-2). Thereafter, when a predetermined step change timing is reached, a notice effect Y (step (Y)) in the second step-up notice is displayed that the beetle character 220 stays on the tree 200 (2-3). When the second step-up notice ends with the notice effect X, an effect is performed in which the beetle character 220 flying from the right is hidden in the shade (leaves) of the tree without being confined to the tree. After that, when changing to the notice effect Z (step (Z)) in the second step-up notice at the change timing of the predetermined step, the process proceeds to FIG. 129 (2-7). On the other hand, when there is no change to the notice effect Z (step (Z)), the beetle character 220 perching on the tree 200 is hidden in the shade (leaves) of the tree as a suggestive effect (remnant display) (2-4). ) And then disappears completely (2-5). The enlarged contents of (2-4) and (2-5) are shown in FIG. After that, when changing to the notice effect z (step (z)) in the second step-up notice at the change timing of the predetermined step, the process proceeds to FIG. When the second step-up notice ends with the notice effect X → Y, it disappears completely (2-5). After the effect is performed, the notice effect z is not performed even if the step change timing elapses. . Therefore, when an effect that completely disappears is performed, the second step-up notice may end as it is.

  In FIG. 129 (2-7), as the background expands to the entire area of the display screen, the tree 200 expands and the beetle character 220 expands. This notice effect is the notice effect Z in the second step-up notice. Thereafter, the shift symbol (“741”) is stopped and displayed without the occurrence of reach (2-8), or the reach is generated and the reach effect is executed (2-9). Also in FIG. 129 (2-6), as the background expands to the entire area of the display screen, the tree 200 expands, the beetle insect character 220 expands, and the beetle insect character 220 moves around. This notice effect is the notice effect z in the second step-up notice. Thereafter, the shift symbol (“741”) is stopped and displayed without the occurrence of reach (2-8), or the reach is generated and the reach effect is executed (2-9).

  Next, a specific example will be described in which the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are simultaneously executed during the same period during variable display as the third notice effect. FIG. 130 is a timing chart showing the notice timing in a specific example of the third notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 130, the notice effect A → B → temporarily end → D → E is executed as the first step-up notice, and the notice effect X → Y → Z or z is executed as the second step-up notice, and reach (super reach) is executed. A notice effect A → B is executed as a first step-up notice and a notice effect X → Y or X → Y → Z is executed as a second step-up notice to show a pattern that is not reachable.

  As shown in FIG. 130, the period from the start of the change in the effect design to the start timing of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice is T1, and the notice effect A is displayed from the start timing of the first step-up notice. The period from the end timing (that is, the start timing of the notice effect B, the change timing of the notice effect A to the notice effect B) is T2, and the notice effect of the second step up notice from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice. The period from the end timing of X (that is, the start timing of the notice effect Y, the change timing of the notice effect X to the notice effect Y) is T3, and the first step up notice from the start timing of the notice effect Y of the second step up notice The end timing of the notice effect B (that is, from the start timing of the notice effect C, the notice effect B) The period until the notice effect C changes) is T4, and the end timing of the notice effect Y of the second step-up notice from the start timing of the notice effect C of the first step-up notice (once in FIG. 130) (that is, the notice effect). Z or the suggestion effect start timing, the period from the notice effect Y to the notice effect Z or the suggestion effect change timing) is T5, the suggestion effect execution period is T6, and the suggestion effect end timing (that is, the start of the notice effect z) The period from the timing) to the notice effect Z of the second step-up notice or the end timing of the notice effect z (that is, the end timing of the second step-up notice) is T7, and the notice effect Z or notice effect z of the second step-up notice The end timing of the notice effect C of the first step up notice from the end timing of The period from the start timing of the effect D, the period from the notice effect C to the change timing of the notice effect D) is T8, and the end timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice from the start timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice ( That is, the period from the start timing of the notice effect E to the start timing of the notice effect E and the change timing of the notice effect E to the notice effect E) is T9, and the notice effect E of the first step up notice is ended from the start timing of the notice effect E of the first step up notice. The period until the timing (that is, the end timing of the first step-up notice) is T10.

  131 to 133 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples in which the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are simultaneously executed during the same period during variable display as the third notice effect. As shown in FIG. 131, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, from the state where the left middle right effect symbols are stopped (FIG. 131 (3-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. Variation of the production symbol is started (3-2), and the variation of the production symbol becomes high-speed fluctuation in the period T1, and the character A210 is used as the announcement effect A in the first step-up notice in the lower area of the display screen of the production display device 9. Appears from the right side of the screen, and the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen as the notice effect X in the second step-up notice (3-2). That is, the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice are simultaneously executed during the same period during variable display. This is an effect in the period T2. Thereafter, the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice. At this time, since the change timing from the notice effect X to the notice effect Y has not yet been reached in the second step-up notice (see FIG. 130), the beetle character 220, which is the notice effect X in the second step-up notice, is displayed. An effect flying from the right side of the screen is continuously executed (3-3). This is an effect in the period T3. After that, while the notice effect B in the first step-up notice is being executed, the timing for changing from the notice effect X of the second step-up notice to the notice effect Y is reached, and the character B211 is moving in the left direction. Furthermore, the beetle character 220 stays on the tree 200 as the notice effect Y in the second step-up notice (3-4). This is an effect in the period T4. Thereafter, the character B211 disappears to the left of the screen, and the timing for changing from the notice effect B of the first step-up notice to the notice effect C is reached, but the notice effect C is not executed, and the notice effect of the second step-up notice is given. Only the effect that the beetle character 220 stops on the tree 200 as Y is continuously executed (3-5). This is an effect in the period T5.

  Thereafter, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second step-up notice (when the notice effect X → Y or the notice effect X → Y → z is executed in the second step-up notice), the beetle insect character 220 is used as the suggestion effect. An effect disappearing behind the tree 200 is executed (3-6). This is an effect in the period T6. Then, when the second step-up effect is finished as it is (when the notice effect X → Y is executed in the second step-up notice), the notice effect of the first and second step-up notices is not executed and the display screen is displayed. The off symbol (“146”) is stopped and displayed (3-7). On the other hand, when the notice effect z in the second step-up notice is executed, when the predetermined change timing after the suggestion effect (3-6) is reached, the background expands to the entire area of the display screen. The beetle character 220 is enlarged as the tree 200 is enlarged, and the effect that the beetle character 220 moves around is further executed (3-8). This corresponds to the effect (notice effect z) in the period T7. Thereafter, the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, and thereafter, an effect corresponding to the notice effect D in the first step-up notice, in which characters A210, B211 and C212 appear simultaneously from the left of the screen is executed (3-9) In addition, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs, an effect in which the character D213 appears from the left side of the screen is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (3-10). This is an effect in the period T8 to T10.

  When the notice effect Z is executed in the second step-up notice, the tree 200 is enlarged and the beetle character 220 is enlarged as the background is enlarged to the entire area of the display screen without executing the suggestion effect. (3-12). This corresponds to the effect (notice effect Z) in the periods T6 and T7. After that, when it becomes non-reach which does not become reach, the shift symbol ("146") is stopped and displayed on the display screen (3-14). On the other hand, after that, the right symbol (“7”) is stopped, and thereafter, an effect in which the character A210, the character B211 and the character C212 appear at the same time corresponding to the notice effect D in the first step-up notice is executed (3). -12). Further, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach is generated, an effect in which the character D213 appears from the left side of the screen is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (3-13). This is an effect in the period T8 to T10. When the notice effect A → B of the first step-up notice is set, as shown in (3-9), (3-10), (3-12), (3-13) The reach state is executed without executing the notice effects D and E of the first step-up notice.

  Next, a specific example of the fourth notice effect will be described. FIG. 134 is a timing chart showing the notice timing in the specific example of the fourth notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 134, a notice effect A → B → end once → D → E as a first step-up notice, a notice effect X → temporarily finish → Z as a second step-up notice, and a movable object notice is the first notice timing. A pattern executed at the second notice timing is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 134, T21 is a period from the start of the change in the production symbol to the start timing of the first step-up notice, the second step-up notice, and the movable object notice, and from the start timing of the first step-up notice. The period from the end timing of the notice effect A (that is, the start timing of the notice effect B, the change timing of the notice effect A to the notice effect B) is T22, and the second step up from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice. The period from the end timing of the notice effect X of the notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect Y, the change timing of the notice effect X to the notice effect Y) is T23, and the notice effect Y of the second step-up notice is temporarily ended in FIG. ) From the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice (ie The period from the start timing of the notification effect C, the change timing of the notification effect B to the change timing of the notification effect C) is T24, and the start of the moving object notification starts from the start timing of the notification effect C of the first step-up notification (which is once ended in FIG. 130). The period until the timing is T25, the period from the start timing of the moving object notice to the end timing of the moving object notice is T26, and the end timing (that is, the second step-up notice notice effect Z) from the end timing of the moving object notice. The period from the end timing of the second step-up advance notice effect Z to the end timing of the first step-up advance notice effect C (that is, the start timing of the notice effect D, the advance notice) The period from the production C to the change timing of the announcement production D) is T28, The period from the start timing of the notice effect D of the up-up notice to the end timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect E and the change timing of the notice effect E to the notice effect E) is T29. The period from the start timing of the notice effect E of the one step up notice to the end timing of the notice effect E of the first step up notice (that is, the end timing of the first step up notice) is T30.

  135 to 136 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fourth notice effect. As shown in FIG. 135, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 135 (4-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The change of the effect symbol is started (4-2), the change of the effect symbol becomes a high-speed change in the period T21, and the first step-up notice starts at the first area in the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Character A210 appears as a notice effect A in the step-up notice from the right side of the screen, and an effect that the beetle character 220 flies from the right side as the notice effect X in the second step-up notice is executed (4-2). In addition, an effect that the movable member 78 provided around the display screen of the effect display device 9 operates (the effect that the dragon movable member 78 falls down) is executed as the movable object notice at the first notice timing. (4-2). This is an effect in the period T22.

  Thereafter, the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (4-3). This is an effect in the periods T23 and T24. At this time, since the second step-up notice is the notice effect X, the beetle character 220 is hidden behind the shadow (leaf) of the tree, and the second step-up notice is ended. Next, after the timing when the player recognizes that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is not executed (the character C212 does not appear) (4-4), that is, after the elapse of the period T25, the movable object at the second notice timing. As a notice, an effect in which the movable member 78 operates (an effect in which the dragon movable member 78 falls down) is executed (4-5). This is an effect in the period T26. Further, as the background expands to the entire area of the display screen, corresponding to the notice effect Z in the second step-up notice, an effect is executed in which the tree 200 is enlarged and the beetle character 220 is enlarged (4). -6). This is the effect in period T27. Thereafter, the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, and thereafter, an effect in which character A210, character B211 and character C212 appear at the same time, corresponding to the notice effect D in the first step-up notice, is executed (FIG. 136 ( 4-7)). Further, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs, an effect in which the character D213 appears is executed as a notice effect E in the first step-up notice (4-8). This is an effect in the period T28 to T30. For example, when the notice effect A → B is selected as the first step-up notice and the notice effect X is selected as the second step-up notice, the effects corresponding to (4-6) to (4-8) are naturally given. The reach production is performed without being performed.

  Next, a specific example of the fifth notice effect will be described. FIG. 137 is a timing chart showing the notice timing in the specific example of the fifth notice effect. The example shown in FIG. 137 shows a pattern in which the notice effect A → B → temporarily ends → D → E as the first step-up notice, the notice effect as the second step-up notice is not executed, and the other system liquid crystal notice is executed. .

  As shown in FIG. 137, the period from the start of the change in the effect design to the start timing of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice is T31, and the notice effect A is displayed from the start timing of the first step-up notice. The period from the end timing (that is, the start timing of the notice effect B, the change timing of the notice effect A to the notice effect B) is T32, and the notice effect of the first step up notice from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice. The period from the end timing of B (that is, the start timing of the notice effect C, the change timing of the notice effect B to the notice effect C) is T33, and the start of the other system liquid crystal notice from the start timing of the notice effect C of the first step-up notice The period up to the timing is T34, and the first time from the start timing of the other system liquid crystal notice. T35 is a period from the end timing of the notification effect C (up once in FIG. 137) of the up-up notification (that is, the start timing of the notification effect D, the change timing of the notification effect C to the notification effect D), and the notification of the first step-up notification The period from the start timing of the effect D to the end timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect E, the change timing of the notice effect D to the notice effect E) is T36, and the first step up notice The period from the start timing of the previous notice effect E to the end timing of the notice effect E of the first step-up notice (that is, the end timing of the first step-up notice) is T37.

  138 to 139 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fifth notice effect. As shown in FIG. 138, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 138 (5-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The change of the effect symbol is started (5-2), the change of the effect symbol becomes a high-speed change in the period T31, and the first step-up notice starts at the first area in the lower area of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Character A210 appears as a notice effect A in the step-up notice from the right side of the screen (4-2) and leaves to the left side of the screen. This is an effect in the period T32.

  Thereafter, when the change timing of a predetermined step comes, the character B211 appears from the right side of the screen as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (5-3), and goes to the left screen. This is an effect in the period T33. Since the second step-up notice is not executed, the beetle character flying from the right does not appear. Thereafter, after the timing when the player recognizes that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is not executed (the character C212 does not appear) (5-4), that is, after the elapse of the period T34, As the background expands to the entire area of the display screen, the tree 200 is expanded, and an effect is also performed in which the semi-character 221 perched on the tree 200 is also expanded (5-5). Or, as another aspect of the other system liquid crystal notice, an effect is performed in which the tree 200 expands as the background expands to the entire area of the display screen, and the stag character 222 perched on the tree 200 also expands. (5-6). The other system liquid crystal notice effect corresponds to the effects (5-5) and (5-6). This is an effect in the period T35. Then, if there is a shift without occurrence of reach, the shift symbol (“146”) is stopped and displayed on the display screen as it is (5-7). On the other hand, when the notice effect D in the first step-up notice is executed, the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, and thereafter, the effect in which the character A 210, the character B 211, and the character C 212 appear simultaneously is executed ( 5-8). Further, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach occurs, the character D213 appears as a notice effect E in the first step-up notice (5-9), and the characters are gathered in the center. Then, in order to execute the predetermined reach state effect thereafter, the characters gathered at the center disappear. This is an effect in the periods T36 and T37. For example, when the notice effect A → B is selected as the first step-up notice, the reach effect is executed without performing the effects corresponding to (5-8) to (5-9). become.

  Next, a specific example of e-mail notice will be described as the sixth notice effect. FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an email notice as the sixth notice effect. As shown in FIG. 140, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 140 (6-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. When the variation of the production symbol is started (6-2), the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation and the start timing of the e-mail notice, the mail reception operation in the e-mail notice is performed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device Then, “mail display contents 230”, “operation button display contents 231” and “Please open the mail by pressing the button!” Are displayed (6-3). Thus, it is notified that the mail has been received, and the operation button 120 is prompted to operate. When the player operates the operation button 120 (or when a predetermined period has elapsed when no operation is performed), the mail is opened and the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed to predict the possibility of a big hit ( 6-4). In this example, since the display content 232 of the letter is “Intense heat”, the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. In (6-4), the contents displayed in the letter are “...” that is not very likely to be a big hit, “chance” that is more likely to be a big hit than “...”, There may be a plurality of types of effects such as “extreme heat” with high possibility. In this case, in order to determine which production mode is to be executed, for example, a production mode setting table having different data depending on whether it is a big hit, a reach in the case of a shift, or a super reach is provided. The effect mode may be selected from the data based on a predetermined random number. At this time, when the data of the production mode setting table is determined to be a big hit in the pre-determination, the determination value of the random number is distributed so that “super heat” can be selected more easily than when it is determined to be out of place. In addition, determination values of random numbers are distributed so that “...” Is not easily selected.

  Next, a specific example of card notice will be described as the seventh notice effect. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a card notice as a seventh notice effect. As shown in FIG. 141, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, when the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 141 (7-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. When the variation of the production symbol is started (7-2), when the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation and the start timing of the card notice, the operation of the card appearance in the card notice is performed near the center of the display screen of the production display device 9 Then, the characters “card display content 235”, “operation button display content 231” and “turn the card by pressing the button!” Are displayed (7-3). As a result, it is notified that a card has appeared and prompts the operation of the operation button 120. When the player operates the operation button 120 (or after a predetermined period of time when no operation is performed), the card is rotated and the display content 235 written on the card is displayed to predict the possibility of a big hit (7 -4). In this example, since the display content 235 of the card is “chance”, the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. In (7-4), the contents displayed on the card may be provided with the same production mode as the above-described mail notice. In this case, similarly to the mail notice, an effect form setting table for card notice may be provided, and the effect form may be selected in the same manner as the mail notice.

  Next, a specific example of the eighth notice effect will be described. FIG. 142 is a timing chart showing the notice timing in the specific example of the eighth notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 142, the notice effect A → B → end once → D → E as the first step up notice, the notice effect X as the second step up notice, and the first mail notice as the mail notice are executed at a later timing. Indicates a pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 142, the period from the start of the change in the effect design to the start timing of the first step-up notice and the second step-up notice is T41, and the notice effect A is displayed from the start timing of the first step-up notice. The period from the end timing (ie, the start timing of the notice effect B, the change timing of the notice effect A to the notice effect B) is T42, and the notice effect of the second step up notice from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice. The period until the end timing of X is T43, and the end timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice from the end timing of the notice effect X of the second step up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect C, the notice effect from the notice effect B) The period until the change timing of production C) is T44, and the first step up T45 is the period from the start timing of the notification effect C (which is once terminated in FIG. 142) to the start timing of the email notification at a later timing, and T46 is the execution period of the email reception effect in the email notification. The execution period of the effect is T47, from the start timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice effect to the end timing of the notice effect D (that is, the start timing of the notice effect E, the change timing of the notice effect D to the notice effect E). The period from the start timing of the notice effect E of the first step-up notice to the end timing of the notice effect E of the first step-up notice (that is, the end timing of the first step-up notice) is T49.

  FIGS. 143 to 144 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the eighth notice effect. As shown in FIG. 143, in the left middle right symbol display area 9L, 9C, 9R, from the state where the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 143 (8-1)), when the start condition is satisfied, Variation of the production symbol is started (8-2), the variation of the production symbol becomes high-speed fluctuation at T41, and the character A210 appears as the announcement effect A in the first step-up notice, and the notice in the second step-up notice. As effect X, the beetle character 220 flies from the right side of the screen (8-2). This is an effect in the period T42. Thereafter, when the predetermined step change timing is reached, the character B211 appears as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (8-3). This is an effect in the periods T43 and T44. At this time, since the second step-up notice is the notice effect X, the beetle character 220 is hidden behind the tree (leaves), and the second step-up notice is ended. Thereafter, after the timing at which it is possible to recognize that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is not executed, that is, after the elapse of the period T45, as an operation of receiving mail in the notice of mail, in the vicinity of the center of the display screen of the effect display device “Mail display content 230”, “operation button display content 231” and “Please open the mail by pressing the button!” Are displayed (8-4). This is an effect in the period T46. When the player operates the operation button 120 (or when a predetermined period has elapsed when no operation is performed), the mail is opened and the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed to predict the possibility of a big hit ( 8-5). This is an effect in the period T47. In this example, since the display content 232 of the letter is “Intense heat”, the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. Thereafter, after the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, an effect for causing the character A 210, the character B 211, and the character C 212 to appear is executed as the notice effect D in the first step-up notice (8-6). Then, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach is generated, an effect of causing the character D213 to appear is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (8-7). This is an effect in the periods T48 and T49. For example, when the notice A → B is selected as the first step-up notice, the reach effect is executed without performing the effects corresponding to (5-8 to (5-9)). .

  Next, a specific example of the ninth notice effect will be described. FIG. 145 is a timing chart showing the notice timing in the specific example of the ninth notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 145, the notice effect A → B → end once → D → E or A → B → C → D → E as the first step-up notice, no execution of the notice effect as the second step-up notice, card As a notice, a pattern in which a card notice is executed at an early timing is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 145, the period from the start of the change of the effect design to the start timing of the first step-up notice is T51, and the end timing of the notice effect A from the start timing of the first step-up notice (that is, the notice effect) The period from the start timing of B, the timing from the notice effect A to the change timing of the notice effect B) is T52, and the period from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice to the start timing of the early card notice is T53. The period from the start timing of the card notice to the end timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect C, the change timing of the notice effect C to the notice effect C) is T54, and the first step up From the start timing of the notice effect C (or once) The period until the end timing of the execution period of the card appearance effect is T55, the execution period of the card release effect in the card notice is T56, and the notice effect D is changed from the start timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice effect. The period from the end timing (that is, the start timing of the notice effect E, the change timing of the notice effect D to the notice effect E) is T57, and the notice effect of the first step up notice from the start timing of the notice effect E of the first step up notice. The period until the end timing of E (that is, the end timing of the first step-up notice) is T58.

  FIGS. 146 to 147 are explanatory diagrams illustrating specific examples of the ninth notice effect. As shown in FIG. 146, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, when the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 146 (9-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The variation of the production symbol is started (9-2), and the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation in the period T51. Appears (9-2). This is an effect in the period T52. Since the second step-up notice is not executed, the beetle character 220 flying from the right does not appear. Thereafter, when the predetermined step change timing is reached, the character B211 appears as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (9-3). This is an effect in the period T53. Then, during the execution of the notice effect B in the first step-up notice, as the operation of the card appearance in the card notice, the “card display content 235” and “operation button display” are displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9. The characters “content 231” and “please turn the card by pressing the button!” Are displayed (9-4). This is because the early timing is selected as the appearance timing of the card notice, and at the late timing described in the eighth notice effect, the card notice appears after the execution of the notice effect B ends. This effect is an effect in the period T55. When the probability of a big hit is high, in response to the player operating the operation button 120 (or after a predetermined period of time if no operation is performed), the card is rotated and the display content 235 written on the card (this example) Then “chance”) is displayed to predict the possibility of a big hit (9-5). When the possibility of super reach is high, in response to the player operating the operation button 120 (or after a predetermined period of time if no operation is performed), the card is rotated and the display content 235 (this is written on the card) In the example, “Super”) is displayed and the possibility of super reach (subsequent big hit) is notified (9-6). This is an effect in the period T56.

  Note that the notice is executed by rotating the card during a period in which the notice effect C in the first step-up notice can be executed. That is, the player can recognize that the card notice is generated during the execution period of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice, but the player can actually confirm the result of the card notice in the notice effect of the first step-up notice. It becomes after the period when C can be executed. This is because during the execution period of the notice effect B, the player does not know whether or not the notice effect C will be executed. This is because even if the result is displayed, the player may not pay attention. By displaying the notice result of the card notice at a timing after the player recognizes that the change to the notice effect C is not performed, the player pays attention to the notice contents of the card notice, and the notice effect is further enhanced. Become effective. Furthermore, even if the player does not change to the notice effect C at the present time of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice, the player has a sense of expectation that a notice that increases the possibility of a big hit by the card notice may be given. It can be recognized at an early timing and it can be interesting. Unlike the notice effect Z and z of the second step-up notice and other system liquid crystal notices, this card notice is not executed on the full screen, so the notice effect C is not executed as the first step-up notice. Even if it is the pattern (9-5) or the pattern (9-6) in which the notice effect C is executed, it can be executed simultaneously (this is the same for the mail notice. (See 10th notice effect).

  Thereafter, after the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, an effect for causing the character A 210, the character B 211, and the character C 212 to appear is executed as the notice effect D in the first step-up notice (9-7). Then, after the right symbol (“7”) is stopped and reach is generated, an effect of causing the character D213 to appear is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (9-8). This is an effect in the periods T57 and T58. For example, when the notice effect A → B is selected as the first step-up notice, the reach effect is executed without performing the effects corresponding to (9-7) to (9-8). become.

  Next, a specific example of the tenth notice effect will be described. FIG. 148 is a timing chart showing the notice timing in the specific example of the tenth notice effect. The example shown in FIG. 148 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 148 as the first step-up notice, the notice effect A → B → temporarily finished → D → E or A → B → C → D → E, and the second step-up notice. This shows a pattern in which the card notice is executed at an early timing as the card notice without performing the notice effect.

  As shown in FIG. 148, T61 is a period from the start of the change in the effect design to the start timing of the first step-up notice, and the end timing of the notice effect A from the start timing of the first step-up notice (that is, the notice effect). The period from the start timing of B, the change timing of the notice effect A to the notice effect B) is T62, and the period from the start timing of the notice effect B of the first step-up notice to the start timing of the e-mail notice is T63. The period from the start timing to the end timing of the notice effect B of the first step up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect C, the change timing of the notice effect C to the notice effect C) is T64, and the notice of the first step up notice E-mail notice from the start timing of production C (or once) The period from the start timing of the mail notice in the mail notice is T65, the period from the start timing of the mail opening in the mail notice to the end timing of the mail notice is T66, and the notice of the first step-up notice effect from the end timing of the mail notice The period until the start timing of the effect D is T67, and the end timing of the notice effect D from the start timing of the notice effect D of the first step-up notice (that is, the start timing of the notice effect E, the change timing of the notice effect D to the notice effect E) ) Is T68, and the period from the start timing of the first step-up notice effect E to the end timing of the first step-up notice effect E (that is, the end time of the first step-up notice) is T69. Yes.

  FIGS. 149 to 152 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the tenth notice effect. As shown in FIG. 149, in the left middle right symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R, when the left middle right production symbol is stopped (FIG. 149 (10-1)), all start conditions are satisfied. The variation of the production symbol is started (10-2), and the variation of the production symbol becomes a high-speed variation in the period T61. Appears (10-2). This is an effect in the period T62. Since the second step-up notice is not executed, the beetle character 220 flying from the right does not appear. Next, the character B211 appears as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice, and “mail display content 230” and “operation” are performed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the mail reception operation in the notice of mail. “Displayed contents 231” and “Please open the mail by pressing the button!” Are displayed (10-3). This is an effect in the periods T63 and T64. The valid period of the operation button 120 for the mail notice continues until the notice effect C can be executed.

  When the player operates the operation button 120 at an early timing with respect to the displayed mail notice, the mail is opened at an early timing, and the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed (10-4). That is, in the first step-up notice, the notice result of the mail notice can be displayed while the notice effect B is being executed. In this example, since the display content 232 of the letter is “continue step-up”, it is possible to recognize in advance that the step-up notice will continue (change), and the player recognizes that the possibility of a big hit is high. This is an effect when the operation button 120 is pressed in the period T64. Then, the character C212 appears as the notice effect C in the first step-up notice while displaying the notice result of the mail notice (10-5). This is an effect in the period T65 to T67. Thereafter, after the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, an effect of causing the characters A, B, and C to appear is executed as the notice effect D in the first step-up notice (10-6), and the right symbol (“ 7 ") is stopped and reach occurs, an effect for causing the character D213 to appear is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (10-7). This is the effect during periods T68 and T69.

  On the other hand, when the player does not readily operate the operation button 120, the e-mail is not opened (10-8), and is the timing at which it can be recognized that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is not executed (10-9)? ), Or the timing at which the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is executed (the timing at which the character C212 appears) (10-11). This is an effect in the periods T64 and T65 when the operation button 120 is not pressed in the period T64 and the operation button 120 is pressed in the period T65. Even at this time, the validity period of the operation button for the mail notice continues. In response to the operation of the operation button 120 after recognizing that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is not executed, the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed (10-10). This is an effect in the periods T66 and T67. On the other hand, even if the operation button 120 is operated after recognizing that the notice effect C in the first step-up notice is executed, the display content 232 of the letter in the mail is displayed (10-12). This is an effect in the periods T66 and T67. In this case, the notice result of the mail notice is displayed during the period in which the notice effect C can be executed. Thereafter, the left symbol (“7”) is stopped, and an effect of causing characters A, B, and C to appear as a notice effect D in the first step-up notice is executed (10-13), and the right symbol (“7”). Is stopped and reach is generated, an effect of causing the character D213 to appear is executed as the notice effect E in the first step-up notice (10-14). This is the effect during periods T68 and T69.

  In this way, the step-up notice and the e-mail notice can appear at the same time, and the valid period of the operation button for the e-mail notice is a period of a plurality of steps of the step-up notice (the execution period of the notice effect B and the execution of the notice effect C). If the player wants to know the notice result of the e-mail notice as soon as possible, the e-mail is sent during the notice effect B during which the notice effect C cannot be recognized by operating early. If you want to know the notice result of the e-mail notice after recognizing whether it changes to the notice effect C, you can recognize the notice result of the notice, do not operate until the timing when the notice effect C is executed, For example, even if you are disappointed once without changing to the notice effect C, the probability of a big hit may increase depending on the notice result of the mail notice. It is possible to maintain the feeling. Therefore, since the notice effect suitable for the player can be executed according to the player's preference, the interest can be improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 370 inputs a predetermined number (this number) based on the detection signal input from the payout number count switch 301 a predetermined number of times (in this example, 10 times). In the example, a prize ball 10 count signal indicating that 10 prize balls have been paid out is output to the game control microcomputer 560. The game control microcomputer 560 subtracts a predetermined value (10 in this example) from the prize ball counter based on the prize ball 10 count signal input from the payout control microcomputer 370. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the output frequency of signals relating to prize ball detection from the payout control microcomputer 370 to the game control microcomputer 560, to prevent an increase in the processing load of the payout control microcomputer 370, and to reduce wiring. It is possible to prevent complication of handling.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the count value of the prize ball counter has reached a predetermined second threshold value (50 or less in this example). Then, based on the determination that the count value of the prize ball counter has reached the predetermined second threshold value, a notification is made that there is an abnormality in the prize ball payout. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act that illegally pays out a prize ball.

  For example, during the rotating operation of the payout motor, the light receiving element of the payout motor position sensor 295 (photo sensor) is improperly irradiated with infrared rays to erroneously detect that it is in a ball-engaged state, and frequently releases the ball-engaged state. By doing so, there is a case where an illegal act is attempted to pay out as many prize balls as the ball biting release operation. In such a case, a general gaming machine recognizes that it is a simple ball biting error, and automatically recovers after about two minutes even if no operation such as pressing the error release switch is performed after the ball biting release operation. It is difficult to recognize that cheating has been done. In this embodiment, when the occurrence of such an illegal act is detected, a prize ball error notification display for notifying the occurrence of a prize ball error due to the illegal action is superimposed and displayed on the effect display device 9. It is possible to prevent an illegal act that illegally pays out a prize ball.

  In this embodiment, a payout case 40A for housing the ball payout device 97 is provided, and the payout case 40A is made using a light shielding material such as aluminum. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an act of illegally paying out a prize ball by irradiating a light receiving element such as a photocoupler provided in the ball dispensing device 97 with infrared rays, and to further strengthen the anti-fraud measures. can do.

  In this embodiment, a signal for outputting information related to the game frame to an external device provided outside the gaming machine (for example, a prize ball information signal based on a signal from the payout control board 37, Door opening signal) and a signal for outputting information on the game board 6 (for example, a start port 1 signal based on information from the main board 31, a symbol determination frequency 2 signal, a symbol determination frequency 1 signal, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 Signal, time-short signal, big hit four signals, big hit three signals) are output using a common information terminal board 34. Therefore, by sharing the information terminal board 34, the number of substrates can be reduced, and the cost in the substrate configuration can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, a prize ball information signal (substantially the same signal as the prize ball 10 count signal) is output to an external device based on the prize ball 10 count signal output by the payout control microcomputer 370. To do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need to newly provide another signal in order to output a signal related to prize ball detection to both the game control microcomputer 560 and the external device. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the need for program change accompanying the prize ball information signal output, and to reduce the work load in the program design stage.

  Also, in this embodiment, the CPU 101 for effect control can be a big hit by changing the notice effect one or more times at a predetermined timing according to a predetermined order during one variable display. The first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect that perform step-by-step notification that there is a possibility are executed, and the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect are displayed in the same period during variable display. Since it is configured to be executable simultaneously, a plurality of step-up notice effects (first step-up notice effect and second step-up notice effect) can be executed simultaneously to improve the interest. Moreover, even if one step-up notice effect is completed, the player's expectation can be directed to the other step-up notice effect, and the player's expectation can be maintained for a long period of time.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 changes the notice effect in the first step-up notice effect at a predetermined change timing and the second step at a timing different from the change timing in the first step-up notice effect. Since the control for changing the notice effect in the up notice effect is executed, the change timing of the notice effect in the plurality of step up notice effects is different. A game can be performed while expecting the occurrence, and further enhancement of interest can be achieved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by complication of the effects due to the plurality of step-up notice effects, and to prevent the effects from being reduced.

  In this embodiment, even when the above-described step-up notice effect is performed on the effect display device 9, when the prize ball error command is received, the effect control CPU 101 performs the step control. Control is performed to superimpose and display a prize ball error notification display on the effect screen of the up notice effect. Therefore, even when the step-up notice effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent an illegal act that illegally pays out a prize ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is configured to execute control to change the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect at a predetermined timing after the first step-up notice effect is finished. Therefore, even if one step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect) ends, the other step-up notice effect (second step-up notice effect) may continue to be executed. The expectation for the occurrence of the big hit can be maintained, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the effect control CPU 101 executes control for changing the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect (for example, control for changing from the notice effect Y to the notice effects Z and z), the effect is given. Since the display area for displaying the preview image on the display device 9 is configured to be enlarged, the player can be impressed with the continuation of the second step-up notification effect.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 executes the first step-up notice effect in the first display area (lower display area) of the effect display device 9, and the second step-up notice effect is an effect display. When the control is executed in the second display area (background display area) in the device 9 and the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect is changed, the second display area is the first display. Since it is expanded over the area, the continuation of the second step-up notice effect can be further emphasized to the player.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 can simultaneously execute the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect during the same period during variable display, and the first or second step-up notice. At least one step-up notice effect (the second step-up notice effect in the above embodiment) of the effects is executed as a notice pattern, after the notice effect (for example, notice effect Y) is executed, and then the notice effect ends. An end suggestion effect (for example, an effect in which a beetle hides in a tree) is executed, a first pattern for ending a notice based on a step-up notice effect and a notice effect (eg, a notice effect Y) are executed, and then an end suggestion effect A second pattern for executing a predetermined next notice effect (for example, notice effect Z) without executing the After executing (Ex. Y), at least three types of notice patterns are provided: a third pattern that executes an end suggestion effect and then executes a predetermined next notice effect (for example, notice effect z). . According to such a configuration, a plurality of step-up notice effects (a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect) can be executed simultaneously to improve interest. In addition, it is possible to make an interest about whether or not the next notice effect (for example, notice effect z) continues after execution of the end suggestion effect, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 is configured to execute the second step-up notice effect at a higher rate than the first step-up notice effect. Specifically, when comparing the first notice setting table for determining the first step-up notice shown in FIG. 109 with the second notice setting table for determining the second step-up notice shown in FIG. 110, More judgment values are assigned to each effect mode in the second notice setting table than in the first notice setting table (conversely, the first notice setting table has more judgments for “none”. A value has been allocated.) According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the second step-up notice effect in which the end suggestion effect can be executed can be increased, and the player can be surely interested in the end suggestion effect, Variations of the second step-up notice effect can be increased by the end suggestion effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, the execution period of the end suggestion effect includes a first recognition timing at which the player cannot recognize whether the next notice effect (notice effect C) is executed in the first step-up notice effect, This is a period including both timings of the second recognition timing at which the player can recognize that the next notice effect (notice effect C) is not executed. Specifically, in the specific example of the third notice effect shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, the character B211 appears as the notice effect B in the first step-up notice (FIG. 131 (3-3)), and the character B211 Passes (FIG. 131 (3-4)), the character B211 disappears from the screen (FIG. 131 (3-5)). At this point, the player does not know whether or not the next notice effect C will be executed. This time is the first recognition timing. Thereafter, when the character C212 does not appear even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the player can recognize that the next notice effect C is not executed (FIG. 132 (3-6)). This time is the second recognition timing. In this embodiment, the execution period of the end suggestion effect is a period including the first recognition timing and the second recognition timing. According to such a configuration, when the notice ends in the first step-up notice effect, the possibility that a next notice effect (for example, notice effect z) is newly executed after the end suggestion effect is maintained is maintained. It is possible to improve the interest by maintaining the player's expectation for the big hit.

  In this embodiment, the notice effect executed in the first step-up notice effect and the second step-up notice effect is an effect using a notice image (character image) displayed on the effect display device 9. Yes, the first step-up notice effect is executed in the first display area (display area at the bottom of the screen) of the effect display device 9, and the second step-up notice effect is displayed in the second display area (background background) of the effect display device 9. Since it is configured to be executed in the display area), even if a plurality of step-up notice effects are executed at the same time, the player can easily recognize and not be confused.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 moves the movable member 78 provided in the game area in addition to the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect, second step-up notice effect). Can be executed to notify that there is a possibility of a big hit, and a change in the notice effect (notice effect C) in the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect in the above embodiment) is possible. When the control to change to the next notice effect is not executed despite the arrival of the timing, the movable object notice effect is executed after the change timing (the effects shown in FIGS. 135 and 136). Example). According to such a configuration, the moving object notice effect is performed after the step-up notice effect appears to have ended once, so that the player's expectation can be held again, and the interest is further improved. Can do.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the effect control CPU 101 executes the movable object notice effect, the notice effect (notice effect D) next to the notice effect (notice effect C) that has not been executed in the first step-up notice effect. ), The first step-up notice effect is revived by the continued execution of the movable object notice effect even though the first step-up notice effect appears to have ended. Can maintain the expectation for the occurrence of big hits and improve the fun of the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 can be a big hit by executing a notice effect different from the notice effect that can appear in the executed step-up notice effect (for example, the first step-up notice effect). The other system notice effect (for example, other system liquid crystal notice effect) that notifies that there is a possibility can be executed, and reach is performed when control to change to a specific notice effect (for example, notice effect C) in the step-up notice effect is executed. The effect control CPU 101 determines that the state is to be established, and the specific advance notice is the next advance notice effect even though the change timing of the specific advance notice effect (notice effect C) is reached in the step-up advance notice effect. Configured to execute other system notice effect after change timing when control to change effect is not executed It is (directed example shown in FIG. 138, FIG. 139). According to such a configuration, it is determined that the reach state is established when the control for changing to the specific notice effect (notice effect C) in the step-up notice effect is executed, so that the step-up notice effect is temporarily ended. The other system notice effect is executed after pretending to be, and it can regain the expectation for the occurrence of the reach state of the player, and the interest can be further improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the effect control CPU 101 executes the other system notice effect (other system liquid crystal notice effect), the next notice of the notice effect (notice effect C) not executed in the step-up notice effect is performed. Since it is configured to execute the effect (notice effect D), even if the step-up notice effect is finished, the step-up notice effect may be restored due to the continuous execution of the other system notice effect. , The expectation for the occurrence of the big hit can be maintained, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the reach state is reached after the other system notice effect (other system liquid crystal notice effect) is executed, the specific reach state (super reach state) that is likely to result in a specific display result. It is preferable that Specifically, in the notice effect setting process, the presence / absence of the other system liquid crystal notice effect is determined in step S587 regardless of the content of the received change pattern command, but the change corresponding to the change pattern of the super reach is shown. Only when the pattern command is received, the process of step S587 is executed. According to such a configuration, the expectation of a big hit when another system notice effect occurs can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the operation button 120 is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and the effect control CPU 101 receives a big hit according to the operation of the operation button 120 by the player in addition to the step-up notice effect. The button notice effect that informs that there is a possibility that the notice effect may occur can be executed, and the change timing of the notice effect (for example, notice effect C) has been reached in the step-up notice effect (first step-up notice effect). When the control to change to the next notice effect is not executed, the button notice effect is executed after the change timing (the example shown in FIG. 140 and the example shown in FIG. 141). According to such a configuration, the button notice effect that can be executed based on the operation of the operation button 120 is executed after the player is made to recognize that the step-up notice effect has once ended, and the player expects the big hit. Can hold for a long time. Further, when the big hit occurs, the step-up notice effect has once ended, so that the impression that the big hit has been generated by itself can be strongly given, and further enhancement of interest can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 executes the notice effect (notice effect D) next to the notice effect (notice effect C) not executed in the step-up notice effect after executing the button notice effect. (Examples of effects shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, examples of effects shown in FIGS. 146 and 147), even if the step-up notice effect appears to have ended, the operation button 120 is used for the advance notice. The production can be recognized as if it was newly revived, and the fun of the game can be further enhanced.

  In this embodiment, the operation effective period (button effective period) in which the operation of the operation button 120 is effective is the execution period of the notice effect (notice effect B) executed before the button notice effect is executed. Since this is the period (examples shown in FIGS. 146 and 147), the player can operate the operation button 120 at his / her favorite timing, and the motivation to participate in the game can be enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the operation button 120 that can be operated by the player is provided, and the effect control CPU 101 provides a specific display result according to the operation of the operation button 120 by the player in addition to the step-up notice effect. The button notice effect can be executed to notify that there is a possibility, and the step-up notice effect and the button notice effect can be executed simultaneously during the same period during variable display. In the up-notice effect (first step-up notice effect), the first recognition timing at which the player cannot recognize whether the next notice effect (notice effect C) is executed, and the player will be notified of the next notice effect (notice effect C). ) Is a period including both timings of the second recognition timing in which it is possible to recognize that it is not executed (the production examples shown in FIGS. 149 to 152). According to such a configuration, when the player operates the operation button 120 at the first recognition timing, the player can recognize whether or not the notice effect (notice effect C) is changed at an early stage. When the operation button 120 is operated at the recognition timing, a sense of expectation can be given again depending on whether or not the button notice effect is executed, and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types of effects (button notification effects and card notification effects) are provided in advance as button notification effects, and the effect control CPU 101 selects one of the plurality of types of button notification effects. Because it is configured to be executed, the variation of the button notice effect increases, and the fun of the game is improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is determined that the reach state is established when the control for changing to the specific notice effect (notice effect C) in the step-up notice effect is executed, and the operation of the operation button 120 is effective. The effective operation period is a period that spans the execution period of a specific notice effect and the execution period of the notice effect that was executed before the specific notice effect is executed. It will extend over both periods of the period in which the state is confirmed, and the player can operate the operation button 120 in both states with different situations to execute the notice effect, thereby improving the interest. it can.

  In this embodiment, in the first step-up notice effect, the first notice effect (when the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display portions (symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R) ( After the execution of the notice effect A), the identification information is derived and displayed in the first stop variable display portion (left symbol display area 9L) from which the identification information is first derived and displayed among the plurality of variable display portions. In the second step-up notice effect, the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display portions (symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R). The first notice effect (notice effect X) starts to be executed at the first stop variable display portion (left symbol display area 9L) where the identification information is first derived and displayed among the plurality of variable display portions. Identification information is derived and displayed Since the final notice effect (notice effect Z, z) is executed before the final notice effect (see FIG. 119), the final notice effect (notice effect E, e, notice effect) in a plurality of step-up notice effects. By varying the execution timing of Z, z), it is possible to feel the expectation of the big hit, and further, it is possible to reduce the step-up notice effect after the first stop, making the player pay attention to the display result of the identification information be able to.

  In this embodiment, in the first step-up notice effect, the first notice effect (when the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display portions (symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R) ( The execution of the notice effect A) is started, and the variable display portion (right symbol display area) other than the third stop variable display portion (middle symbol display area 9C) from which the identification information is finally derived and displayed among the plurality of variable display portions. 9R), the final notice effect (notice effect E, e) is executed after reaching the reach state in which the identification information is derived and displayed and constitutes a part of the combination of the specific display results. In the step-up notice effect, the execution of the first notice effect (notice effect X) is started when the identification information is variably displayed in all the variable display portions (symbol display areas 9L, 9C, 9R), Multiple variable In the state where the identification information is derived and displayed on the variable display portion (right symbol display area 9R) other than the third stop variable display portion (middle symbol display area 9C) from which the identification information is derived and displayed last. Since the final notice effect (notice effect Z, z) is executed before reaching the reach state (see FIG. 123), the final notice effect (notice effect E) in a plurality of step-up notice effects. , E, different notice timings Z, z), it is possible to increase the expectation of a big hit, and after the third stop, the step-up notice effects can be reduced, and the player is given identification information. It is possible to focus on the display result.

  As shown in FIGS. 119, 121 to 123, etc., the execution start timing of the first step-up notice and the execution start timing of the second step-up notice effect are the same, but they may be different timings.

  Also, the change timing of each notice effect A, B, C, D, E, e in the first step-up notice effect and the change timing of each notice effect X, Y, Z, z in the second step-up notice effect Although the timing is different, the timing may be the same. For example, the notice effect X changes from the notice effect X to the notice effect Y at the timing when the notice effect A changes to the notice effect B, and changes from the notice effect Y to the notice effects Z and z at the timing when the notice effect B changes to the notice effect C. You may comprise.

  In addition, it is preferable that each of the notices shown in the above embodiments can execute a plurality of kinds of notice modes (effect modes of notice effects) in the notice. For example, in the first step-up notice, the notice effect A includes a plurality of different kinds of notice effects A1, A2, A3... (For example, the color of clothes of the character A is different). In addition, the movable object notice or the blade object notice includes a plurality of different movable forms (movable speed, movable range, number of movements, etc.) as movable aspects of the movable member 78 and the blade object 79. In addition, button notifications include multiple types of display content (for example, "...", "chance", "super reach", etc., multiple types of different characters, display colors even if the display content is the same) Are different, etc.). In addition, the frame lamp notice includes a plurality of types of light emission modes (light emission speed, light emission color, etc.) as light emission modes. In addition, the mini character notice includes different appearances of different mini characters and different mini characters. The other-system liquid crystal preview includes a plurality of types of preview images (for example, seminar images and stag images) as the preview images displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Thus, any one of the production modes included in the predetermined notice is selected and executed.

  In the above embodiment, in the step-up notice, the execution rate of the notice and the notice mode (the notice effect) are determined depending on which variation pattern is out of non-reach, normal reach, super reach, or big hit. The appearance rate is changed, but a notice setting table is provided for each variation pattern, and the notice value is executed according to the contents of the probability change pattern by changing the distribution value in each table. You may make it change a rate and the appearance rate of a notice aspect. For example, when the variation pattern executes a special effect such as pseudo-ream or sliding, the execution rate of the step-up notification or the appearance rate of a predetermined notification mode may be improved.

  In addition, in the notices other than the step-up notice, the presence / absence of the notice and the appearance rate of the notice form (effect form of the notice effect) are changed depending on whether or not it is a big hit. A plurality of different notice setting tables are provided, and a plurality of different allocations are determined according to the determination result of the pre-determining means (out-going or big hit, the type of big hit in the case of big hit) or the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determining means. Any one of the notice setting tables may be selected, and the notice form to be executed may be determined based on the selected table and the notice determination random number. By configuring in this way, depending on the type of jackpot when it is a big hit in advance, execution of each notice depending on whether it will reach even in the event of a loss, and whether it will develop into a super reach at the time of reach The rate and the appearance rate of the notice mode can be determined. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern executes a special effect such as pseudo-ream or sliding, it is possible to improve the notice execution rate and the appearance rate of a predetermined notice mode.

  In the above embodiment, the CPU 56 determines the type of the variation pattern using the type random number, and determines the variation pattern in the determined variation pattern type using the variation pattern determination random number. However, the effect control CPU 101 determines the type of the notice effect using the notice type random number, and determines the notice effect within the determined notice effect type using the notice effect determination random number. Also good. For example, it is impossible to simultaneously execute another system liquid crystal notice and a button notice executed at a later timing. The other system LCD notice displays a notice image (an image in which a cicada or a stag beetle is stuck on a tree; see FIGS. 139 (5-5) and (5-6)) in the entire area of the display screen. This is because the button preview effect image cannot be displayed during display. Therefore, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether to perform the notice of another system liquid crystal notice or the button notice as the notice effect type by using a preliminarily provided notice type random number, and then determines the decided notice type. (For example, as shown in FIG. 113 in the case of other system liquid crystal notices, “no notice” or “execution of notice”, as shown in FIG. 112 in the case of button notice) "No notice" "First mail notice (early timing)" "First mail notice (late timing)" "Second mail notice (early timing)" "Second mail notice (late timing)" "Card notice (early timing) ) ”Or“ Card advance notice (late timing) ”). According to such a configuration, it is possible to reliably avoid selecting a combination of announcement effects that cannot be executed simultaneously.

  Further, if the type of the notice effect is determined by using the random number, the type of the notice effect is determined based on the table corresponding to the type of the decided notice effect. While changing the appearance ratio (without changing the distribution value in the notice type table for determining the type of the notice effect), changing the appearance ratio of the notice effect form (in the notice setting table for determining the notice effect form) On the contrary, the appearance ratio of the type of the notice effect is changed (although the distribution value in the notice type table is changed), but the appearance ratio of the form of the notice effect is not changed (the notice setting table). It is possible to easily realize a design change such that the distribution value in (1) is not changed. As a result, when changing the type of the notice effect and the appearance ratio of the notice effect according to the model change etc., it is not necessary to change all the data (table distribution values), and some data ( It can be easily realized only by changing the notice type table or the setting value of the notice setting table) (that is, it is not configured to determine the type of the notice effect after determining the type of the notice effect, When it is desired to change only the appearance rate of the production mode included in the type of the predetermined notice effect, or when it is desired to cause the type of the given notice effect to appear at a higher rate than the type of the other notice effect, the notice in each notice It is necessary to change all the contents of the table in which the aspect of production is set, and it is difficult to realize such a change). Since the variation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type random number and then the variation pattern included in the variation pattern type is determined, the same effect as the above case can be obtained. That is, the contents of the variation pattern determination table when only changing the appearance rate of the variation pattern included in the predetermined variation pattern type is desired or when it is desired to cause the predetermined variation pattern type to appear at a higher rate than other variation pattern types. Must be changed, and it is difficult to realize such a change.

  In the present invention, the step-up notice effect means that a notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages according to a predetermined order can be executed. This refers to an effect with a high ratio of executing the notice effect that changes the aspect of the effect in stages until there are more stages than when the display result is not used.

  In the first step-up notice effect, execution of the first notice effect (for example, notice effect A) is started when the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display parts, and a plurality of variable display parts are displayed. After the identification information is derived and displayed in the first stop variable display section (for example, the left symbol display area 9L) from which the identification information is first derived and displayed, the final notice effect (for example, the notice effects E and e) is displayed. Change (that is, after the identification information is derived and displayed in the variable display section of the first stop), in the second step-up notice effect, When the identification information is variably displayed on the variable display portion, the first notice effect (for example, the notice effect X) is started, and the identification information is first derived and displayed among the plurality of variable display portions. 1 stop variable Before the identification information is derived and displayed in the display part (for example, the left symbol display area 9L), the final notice effect (for example, the notice effect Z, z) is changed (that is, from the notice effect Y to the notice effect Z, z). The change timing is before the identification information is derived and displayed on the first stop variable display, in other words, after the identification information is derived and displayed on the first stop variable display. There is no change timing of the notice effect in the effect).

  Further, in the first step-up notice effect, when the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display parts, the execution of the first notice effect (for example, notice effect A) is started, and a plurality of variable display parts The identification information is derived and displayed on a variable display portion (for example, the right symbol display area 9R) other than the last stopped variable display portion (for example, the middle symbol display area 9C) from which the identification information is finally derived and displayed. Change to the final notice effect (for example, notice effect E, e) after reaching the reach state constituting a part of the combination of the specific display results (that is, the change timing from the notice effect D to the notice effect E, e). In the second step-up notice effect, when the identification information is variably displayed on all the variable display portions, the first notice effect (for example, the notice effect) ), And changes to the final notice effect (for example, notice effects Z, z) before entering the reach state (that is, before the change timing from the notice effect Y to the notice effects Z, z becomes the reach state). In other words, there is no change timing of the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect after reaching the reach state).

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine provided with two special symbol displays (the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b) as a variable display unit is taken as an example. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine provided with a special symbol display.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which a circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to 100. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and in particular, a player can play a predetermined game using the gaming medium, and the gaming medium is determined based on the fact that the payout condition is satisfied. The present invention is preferably applied to a payout gaming machine.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is the rear view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the back. It is the front view and sectional drawing which show the ball dispensing apparatus covered with the dispensing case. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structural example of a ball dispensing apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the component relevant to payout, such as a payout control board and a ball payout apparatus. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of operation | movement of a movable member. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of an information terminal board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the allocation of the output port in a game control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the allocation of the output port in a game control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the bit allocation of the input port in a game control means. It is a circuit diagram which shows the internal structure of an information terminal board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a jackpot determination table, a jackpot type determination table, and a probability variation promotion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows a reach determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the EXT data (YY part) of command FFYY (H) (input port data designation | designated command). It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a payout command signal. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line etc. which are used for transmission / reception of each control signal shown in FIG. It is a timing chart showing an example of how to output a payout command signal and the like. It is a timing chart showing an example of how to output a prize ball 10 count signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows each 1 byte buffer formed in RAM used by switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process example of a switch process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a prize ball number table. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows prize ball waiting processing 1. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning ball waiting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows prize ball waiting processing 3. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball counter subtraction process. It is a flowchart which shows an input port data confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is a flowchart which shows an information output process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the bit allocation of the output port in the microcomputer for payout control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the bit allocation of the input port in the microcomputer for payout control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which a payout control means performs. It is a flowchart which shows payout control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a main control communication process. It is a flowchart which shows main control communication normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during main control communication. It is a flowchart which shows a main control communication end process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball lending control process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball lending control process. It is a flowchart which shows the payout start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a payout motor stop waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a timing diagram for explaining a ball biting detection process. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating a ball biting cancellation | release process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the kind of error, and the display of LED for an error display. It is a flowchart which shows an error process. It is a flowchart which shows an error process. It is a timing diagram which shows the mode of occurrence of the payout case error. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the aspect of the variable display of a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the random number which the microcomputer for production control uses. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a left-right output determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the last stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a specific production pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is explanatory drawing which shows a design fluctuation control pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an effect control pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation performed according to the content of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd notice setting table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a movable-object notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a button notice selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for selecting another notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of the 1st step-up notice, the 2nd step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of the 1st step-up notice, the 2nd step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of the 1st step-up notice, the 2nd step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the propriety of the combination of the 1st step-up notice, the 2nd step-up notice, the movable object notice, the button notice, and the other system liquid crystal notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a timing diagram which shows the execution timing of various notice effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern (notice pattern) which develops from step (Y) to step (Z) or (z) in the 2nd step-up notice effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st modification of the execution timing of various notice effects. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd modification of the execution timing of various notice effects. It is a timing diagram which shows the 3rd modification of the execution timing of various notice effects. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each notice effect in a 1st step-up notice, and the content of each notice effect in a 2nd step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 1st step-up notice as a 1st notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 2nd step-up notice as a 2nd notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 2nd step-up notice as a 2nd notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 2nd step-up notice as a 2nd notice effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the 3rd notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example simultaneously performed in the same period in which the 1st step-up notice and the 2nd step-up notice are variably displayed as the third notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example simultaneously performed in the same period in which the 1st step-up notice and the 2nd step-up notice are variably displayed as the third notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example simultaneously performed in the same period in which the 1st step-up notice and the 2nd step-up notice are variably displayed as the third notice effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the 4th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 4th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 4th notice effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the 5th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 5th notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 5th notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an email notice as a 6th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a card notice as a 7th notice effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the 8th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 8th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the 8th notice effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the 9th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 9th notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 9th notification effect. It is a timing diagram which shows the notice timing in the specific example of the 10th notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 10th notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 10th notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 10th notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 10th notification effect.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st starting winning port 14 2nd starting winning port 15 Variable winning ball device 9a 1st decoration symbol display device 9b 2nd decoration Symbol display 18c Total hold memory display 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
78 Movable members 79a, 79b Blades (one type of movable members)
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU

Claims (6)

A gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game using a game medium and pays out a game medium based on the fact that a payout condition is satisfied,
Game control means for executing a game control process for controlling the progress of the game;
A payout means for paying out the game medium;
A payout control means for executing a payout control process for controlling the payout means;
A payout detecting means for detecting payout of a prize game medium as a prize based on establishment of a payout condition by a game, and outputting a detection signal only to the payout control means;
The payout control means outputs to the game control means a prize game medium payout signal indicating that a predetermined number of prize game media have been paid out based on the input of the detection signal from the payout detection means a predetermined number of times. A prize game medium payout signal output means
The game control means includes
A payout command command sending means for sending a payout command command capable of specifying a payout number of premium game media based on the fact that the payout condition is satisfied, to the payout control means;
The difference between the number of payouts specified by the payout command command based on the transmission of the payout command command and the number of payouts specified by the input of the prize game medium payout signal from the payout control means reaches a predetermined threshold value. A prize game medium number judging means for judging whether or not
Abnormality notification control means for performing control for notifying that there is an abnormality in payout of the prize game medium based on the determination that the predetermined threshold is reached by the prize game medium number determination means A gaming machine characterized by that. A dispensing means storage case for storing the dispensing means is provided,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the payout means storage case is manufactured using a light shielding material. A game frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame;
A game board attached to the game frame, including a predetermined plate-like body and various components attached to the plate-like body;
A signal for outputting information relating to the gaming frame and a signal for outputting information relating to the gaming board are output to an external device provided outside the gaming machine using a common external output board. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising an external output unit. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the external output means outputs the prize game medium payout signal to an external device based on the prize game medium payout signal output by the payout control means. A variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them, and when the display result of the identification information in the variable display unit becomes a predetermined specific display result, a specification that is advantageous to the player A gaming machine that controls the gaming state,
Pre-decision means for deciding whether or not to make the specific display result before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed;
Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the specific display result is obtained by changing the notice effect one or more times at a predetermined timing in accordance with a predetermined order during one variable display. A notice effect execution means for executing a step-up notice effect for informing stepwise that there is a possibility,
The step-up notice effect includes a first step-up notice effect and a second step-up notice effect different from the first step-up notice effect,
5. The notice effect execution means can simultaneously execute the first step up notice effect and the second step up notice effect as the step up notice effect in the same period during variable display. A gaming machine according to any of the above. The notice effect execution means changes the notice effect in the first step-up notice effect at a predetermined change timing and performs the notice effect in the second step-up notice effect at a timing different from the change timing in the first step-up notice effect. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein control for changing is executed.

Images